JP6803503B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

There is a game machine that notifies a plurality of game states and various information on a batch display device provided on the surface of the game board .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-83175

However, since the batch display device collectively notifies the game state, it does not necessarily make it easier for the player to understand the progress of the game .

In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of notifying a game progress that is easy for a player to understand .

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine as shown below is provided. The game machine includes a batch display device, a first light emitting unit, and a second light emitting unit on the front side. The batch display device has a plurality of indicator lights, and can notify the result derivation display and the result display of the variable display game by a predetermined number of indicator lights. The control unit has a first display mode in which the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit synchronize with each other to sequentially switch a plurality of emission colors to emit light, and the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit have a control unit. A second display mode in which a plurality of emission colors are sequentially switched to emit light with a predetermined time difference, and a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit can be controlled, and the first game is executed. When a game state occurs, the special game state is notified in the first display mode, and then the special game state and the first game are notified in the second display mode .

According to one aspect, the game machine can notify the game progress that is easy for the player to understand .

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the game machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch reading process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port switch common processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of the 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a variation start process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process while opening the big prize opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during opening of a big winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit fanfare middle processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit middle processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit medium processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 3 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general drawing game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the Fukuden winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 1 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the change of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process which is displaying the ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the processing during display of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process in the ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary fluctuation winning apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end processing per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the segment LED editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the special figure 1 in the state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the general drawing in the state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the changing display of special figure 1 and the changing display of a normal figure in the state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the special figure 1 in the state 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of a normal figure in the state 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the changing display (modification example) of the special figure 1 of 1st Embodiment, and the changing display (transformation example) of a general drawing. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional distribution of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the special figure 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the special figure 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the changing display of special figure 1 and the changing display of special figure 2 of the modification 1 of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the special figure 1 of the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during change of the special figure 1 of the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the light emitting part in the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the light emitting part in the option setting part of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emitting color in the light emitting part of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rainbow color display effect in the 1st arc-shaped light emitting group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display color switching timing of the rainbow color display effect in the 1st arc-shaped light emitting group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the 1st arc-shaped light emitting group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display color switching timing of a clockwise rainbow color display and the display color switching timing of a counterclockwise rainbow color display in the 1st arc-shaped light emitting group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the 2nd arc-shaped light emitting group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the 3rd arc-shaped light emitting group of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration control processing in the effect control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in fanfare in the effect control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the event decoration setting process in the effect control apparatus of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the emission color in the light emitting part of the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display | screen in the display device of the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the linear light emitting group of the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the massive light emitting group of the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the alert display and the arrangement of the light emitting part in the game machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display content example of the caution display of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display effect starting from the caution display of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode switching timing of the movement display effect in the 1st arc-shaped light emitting group and the 2nd arc-shaped light emitting group of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display effect which ends with the alert display of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in fanfare in the effect control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display effect which sets the attention display of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment as a start point and end point. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode switching timing of the movement display effect in the 1st arc-shaped light emitting group and the 2nd arc-shaped light emitting group of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the arrangement example of the warning display of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement display effect which sets the caution display of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment as a start point or the end point. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in fanfare in the effect control device of the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decoration part and the light emitting mode in the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a correspondence relationship between the progress of the special figure game and the game effect of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the correspondence relationship between the synchronous game effect and the asynchronous game effect in the big hit game state of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a round in the effect control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decoration part and the light emitting mode in the game machine of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power-on decoration setting process in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power failure recovery decoration setting process in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decorative part of the gaming machine of 6th Embodiment, and the light emitting mode in a normal state (no abnormality and presence | abnormality). It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decorative part of the game machine of 6th Embodiment, and the light emitting mode at the time of a big hit (there is no abnormality and there is an abnormality). It is a figure which shows an example of the light emitting mode according to the game state of the main body frame light emitting part and the game board light emitting part of the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting processing during change in the effect control device of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a round in the effect control device of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decorative part of the gaming machine of 6th Embodiment, and the light emitting mode at the time of an abnormality (normal state and big hit state). It is a figure which shows an example of the light emitting mode according to the game state of the outer edge light emitting group, the push button light emitting part, the steering wheel light emitting part, and the inner edge light emitting group of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of light emitting mode by game machine type of the main body frame light emitting part and game board light emitting part of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a round in the effect control device of the modification 2 of the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decoration part and the light emitting mode in the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the display state before and after the power failure of the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emitting mode according to the game state of the specific light emitting part and the non-specific light emitting part of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power failure recovery decoration setting process in the effect control device of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device which the board effect device in the game board of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment is in the initialization operation. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the display state after the power failure recovery of the game machine of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the power failure recovery decoration setting process in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decoration part and the light emitting mode in the gaming machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the display state during the normal electric support of the game machine of the modification 1 of the 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the decoration part and the light emitting mode in the gaming machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the opening mode of the big winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of 9th Embodiment, and the light emitting mode of the big winning opening light emitting part. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a round in the effect control device of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the open state of the big winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the 9th Embodiment and the light emitting mode of the big winning opening light emitting part. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in fanfare in the effect control device of the modification 1 of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the open state of the big winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the 9th Embodiment and the light emitting mode of the big winning opening light emitting part. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in a round in the effect control device of the modification 2 of the 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening mode of the big winning opening by the big hit type of the game machine of the modification 3 of the 9th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure (No. 1) which shows an example of the big prize opening notice which is open target in the game board of tenth embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the big prize opening notice which is open target in the game board of tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the board effect device operating state and the big prize opening light emitting state during the big hit of the game machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the board effect device operating state during the big hit of the game machine of the tenth embodiment, and the big winning opening light emitting state. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the board effect device operating state during the big hit of the game machine of the tenth embodiment, and the big winning opening light emitting state. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of the modification 3 of the tenth embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of POP shooting in the game machine of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the POP of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the POP display in the display device of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the POP setting condition monitoring process in the effect control apparatus of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the POP setting process in the production control apparatus of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the POP setting information detection processing in the effect control apparatus of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting information acquired from the 2D bar code of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the POP display process in the effect control apparatus of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the POP display cancel process in the effect control device of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the change of the display mode of the POP display in the display device of eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the POP of the modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the POP shooting in the game machine of the modification 2 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fraud situation recording process in the effect control apparatus of the modification 3 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the connection example of the effect control device and the push button of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the arrangement example of the push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in the variable display game using the push button of the twelfth embodiment of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the feedback of the result of the roulette display effect from the push button to the display device of the twelfth embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are abnormal. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an option setting unit 25 in which the player sets various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the game machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect of intervening the operation of the player includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the game machine 10 is the display device. The character displayed on the 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always provided. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for winning the starting winning opening 36, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Here, in the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and the player moves to the right game area. The game ball launched with the above is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a general drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, the control system of the game machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, the input unit 120 having an input port, the output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like that generate a clock. A predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100. To be operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for the solenoid or the display device to output the game machine 10. Control the whole. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock variation display game A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (state), the operating state (time saving operating state), the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from the plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. , The high level is 11V and the low level is 7V, which is connected to the gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. When the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor or the switch are detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121. The abnormality detection signal 1 output to is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111 (changes to an effective level). By doing so, it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided that takes in the original signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. There is.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140, and is a general electric solenoid 37c that opens a large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 displays images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for the purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A Fe RAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for the purpose are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address bus / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, an effect switch 47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311. And put them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55, a process of displaying the normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the starting prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game A random value for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, it is used for determining the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). ..

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. The control is performed. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. One round is set to open, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a big winning opening opening / closing control means that controls opening and closing of the big winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol, opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) of the third stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power release number, and the normal power release time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal figure, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The batch display device 50 displays various states depending on the lighting mode of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

By allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 51, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. A general symbol symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, and a state display unit 57 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting modes of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h at the beginning of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to validity determination (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Next, after performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the game machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not it is (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the check count of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this first embodiment) is set (step S15). From the state of the first input port 122 read earlier, it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16).

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step). If S17) is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether or not the checksums of are matched (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). ), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50. The on (lighting) data of the device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, Otherwise, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

On the other hand, when the transition from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined value is set. A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the winning symbol of the special figure is determined. RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random number to be performed (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number) After saving in the predetermined area of (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. ), The regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are the program's. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by "+1" or "-1", or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step S35 also includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid the initial value random number update process being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the game machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the checksum calculation process of the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S103).

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the initial value random number update process of the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is "+1". (Step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that becomes. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the above-mentioned main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S121). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal capture, that is, input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S124) for controlling the drive of the actuators such as the solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the random number update process 1 (step S126), and the random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( The winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) for performing the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is performed (whether the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are not opened, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S130) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), which checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio wave fraud, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the input process of the first embodiment.

In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and the switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S150). Step S151), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, the switch reading process (step S153) is performed to end the input process.

As the switches to be monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame open detection switch 63, a main body frame open detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (handled as unused in this process), There are a power failure monitoring signal (handled unused in this process), a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400. The switches to be monitored by the second input port 123 include a start port 1 switch 36a (“start port 1 winning signal”) and a start port 2 switch 37a (“start port 2 winning signal” and “ordinary electric accessory 1 due to pattern branching”. Also output as "winning signal 1"), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a (related to "ordinary symbol 1") There is a gate pass signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S148, S153) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the switch reading process of the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S161). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area 1 Save (store) in (step S164). After that, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S165).

When the delay time (about 100 μs) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step S169). After that, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S170), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is a fixed bit (step S171).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second readings (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step S174), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S175). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, the correct determination may not be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S124) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The line output data is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_31 from the LED_00 of the batch display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, a normal symbol display, a normal figure hold display, and There is a status display (game status display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol confirmation number signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". "Signal" etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and the launch permission signal output (step S191).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is the process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is the process of transmitting the payout command.

In the payout command transmission process, first, among a plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), each of them is checked. , It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area 2 that stores up to 255 prizes (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed. In this way, the payout command is not sent for each timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for turning on the payout busy signal are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud occurrence". "Medium", "Abnormality of payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor payout balls)", "Payout insufficient error", "Payout excess error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). ; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and in step S214, it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 1 of the first embodiment. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). When the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). If the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next big hit symbol random number of the loaded general figure The initial value of is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S233). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S236). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

When the hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). When the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the random number counter corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded hit random number (step S238). It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area) (step S239). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is corresponded to. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 is both. Is the update target, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is set from "0" to "3". Update within the range (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed a cycle.

Subsequently, for example, a random counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter for which the value is set is loaded (step S254). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether or not the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). Then, when the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is masked). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the value obtained), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step S258). ), The process proceeds to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (2 bytes). Step S260) and step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

In step S262, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step S264), and this value is 1 byte. It is saved in the random number area lower than the random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). , The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning port switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table (for example, the port to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is input. Data indicating the number of the signal, the bit position of the signal in the port, and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) to win the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is obtained. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) to be detected is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S275), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S275) is performed to monitor for illegal winning and detect normal winning. Step S276) is executed.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. The number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error status of the game machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is set to "0". To update in the range of "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S280). Then, the game machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a game machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S282). Then, a game machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the game machine state in the game machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the game machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. The game machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of is prepared (step S285). Then, the game machine state check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is completed. Note that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed in a 16 ms cycle.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraud & winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in each winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, "data for determining whether or not there is an input (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of fraudulent monitoring information", and "illegal winning""Lower address of several areas", "Illegal winning error notification command", "Illegal winning number upper limit (number of illegal winning judgments)", "Winning opening switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that the information is defined.

This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. For the large prize opening (special variable prize device 38) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting the game ball, and paying out the prize ball. Besides, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch for which the game machine status is monitored is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the game machine state is the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the game machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S293). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S293). For example, it is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (step S295).

The number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the immediate judgment of fraud when a prize is won after passing the mark or when noise is added to the signal. As a result, it is possible to prevent a simple determination of fraud even when it is not necessarily fraudulent.

Then, when the number is not equal to or more than the determined number (step S295; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the number of determinations (step S295; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S298), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and the winning number counter update process (step S301) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), this fraud & winning monitoring process ends. As information for which the update of the notification timer is not permitted, there is a large winning opening switch 38a. This is due to the fact that one big winning opening is monitored with two switches. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer will time up in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer update, the update at the timing of the big winning opening switch that performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. Further, when the notification timer is permitted to be updated as in the large winning opening switch and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 that are to be monitored later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is "0". If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to "0".

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch for the game machine status monitoring target is one of the large winning opening switches 38a, and when the winning opening switch for the gaming machine status monitoring target is the other large winning opening switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the game machine state is the large winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305), and if the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, fraud & winning monitoring End the process. Further, when the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S306), and the illegal prize release flag is prepared as the illegal flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

When the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is set. It is cleared (step S309), and the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310). Further, when the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value becomes "0" (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S310; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S311). Step S312), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, the fraudulent notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the occurrence of fraud, and the fraudulent winning fraud release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update processing (steps S278 and S301) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, the information of the "repetition count" and the "data for determining whether or not there is an input" defined for each switch (Monitoring switch bit) ”,“ lower address of the winning number counter area 1 ”and“ lower address of the winning number counter area 2 ”are defined.

In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (Step S322).

If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs. (Step S325). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for the winning ball (sending the payout command) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of "0" to "65535". If an overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S329). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of "0" to "255". If an overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S322). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, a prize ball is set according to the winning.

[Game machine status check process]
Next, the game machine state check process (step S286) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of the first embodiment. In addition, in each game machine state monitoring table prepared by the winning port switch / state monitoring process, "lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area" and "port of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored""Lower address of input state area", "Mask data to extract only the bits of the target signal", "Signal on judgment data", "Status off command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to end error notification)", Information of "status on command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to start error notification)", "status off monitoring timer comparison value", and "status on monitoring timer comparison value" is defined, respectively.

In this game machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether or not it is in a state indicating an error. Determine (step S342). The case where the signal to be monitored is not on means a normal state in which the error system is not an error, and the touch switch means a non-touched state. Further, when the signal to be monitored is on, it means an error (abnormal, invalid) state for an error system, and a touched state for a touch switch.

In step S342, when the signal is not on (step S342; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S343), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S342; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S346), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S349; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S349; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this game machine status check process is terminated. When the value of the target status monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). ), The prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S355).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S355; Y), this game machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the state prepared above is turned off. The effect command setting process for transmitting either the command or the status on command is performed (step S357), and the game machine status check process is completed.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of the first embodiment.

In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361), and if the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value set here.

In step S361, when the payout busy signal is on (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

Next, the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). When the value in the busy signal state region and the current signal state match (step S366; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369). It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). Further, when the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the current signal do not match (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state region (step S366; N). Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), this payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or higher than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). , The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S129) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set. In the special figure game process, first, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted. This is performed, and the game result is preliminarily determined based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a (large winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has been up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure that sets information necessary for processing, etc., is performed normally (step A8).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but if it is the final round. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) is performed to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, set the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit medium processing. Perform the small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", set the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, and set the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing. The small hit medium processing (step A16) to be performed is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to see if the starting port 1 is won. Whether or not it is determined (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). .. The determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is being supported by the electric power, and does not include the high or low of the probability state as the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the starting port 1 during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in operation. When it is determined whether or not the device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 Moves to the processing of and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a general electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), a special figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A121) to start. It is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed. ..

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a special figure start port switch common process of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), step A134 is passed and the process proceeds to step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value ( Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by "+1" ( Step A136), the start opening winning flag to be monitored is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A138). Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the starting port 1 has not been won (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the starting port 1 has been won (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of RWM is extracted. Save to the storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.

Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of starting memories that are the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage up to a predetermined number, and starts. Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, the start opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) has been won (step A151).

If it is determined in step A151 that the starting port 1 is not a prize (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the starting port 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A152, when it is determined that the special figure time is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not being hit or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the starting port 1 has not been won (step A158; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and thereafter. Perform the processing of.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A159) for determining the above is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is provided. It is acquired (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process (step A165) is performed. Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A169) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state (step A201). If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A205, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the processing for the remaining balls of the large winning opening is being performed (step A202).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is not in progress (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the processing is in progress during the small hit (in the small hit game state) (step A203).

If the small hit middle process is in progress (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204).

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

Since the value of the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game is checked by checking the value of the special figure game processing number. Can be checked. Therefore, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to determine whether or not the large winning opening is being processed, the large winning opening remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, and the small hit remaining ball is being processed. I will do it.

Then, "0" is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the winning opening that is added in the large winning opening switch monitoring process this time (step A205), and is there an input to the large winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

If there is no input to the grand prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to ". +1 ”update (step A209).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210), and if there is no input in the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. Subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), the effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to ". +1 ”update (step A213).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), and when the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215), and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215). In step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216), and when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; At Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (“1” or “2”) is added to the number of large winning openings (step A217), and the number of large winning openings is increased. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the processing during the small hit is in progress (step A221).

If the small hit middle process is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. When the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the value of the end of the small hit opening operation is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not been started. (Step A311; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), the effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. .. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

Further, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A303), and the effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

Further, in step A306, when the special figure 1 reserved number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A308), and the effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A322).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 is completed. To do.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A307) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special figure 1 Figure The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 30 for the second start memory. It is done as.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure 2 Figure The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM, prepared (step A353), and the information of the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A354). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A355) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined (step SA356).

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A373). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined (step SA375).

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing, and jackpot flag 2 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of order. Therefore, “other than big hit (missing)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state) (step A383). ..

Then, in the case of high probability (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step). A386).

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or a miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of order. , "Other than big hit (missing)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit determination process of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, the small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit judgment is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit judgment. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of order, the outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value is determined. Determine (step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is out of order, the outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of holds). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). Further, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in the special figure 1, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be the probability variation depending on whether or not the game state is in the probability variation. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the mode is probable. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A410; Y), special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and the effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). , The information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (step A431; Y) Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1 hold number) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a dedicated effect mode in which the probability change is confirmed regardless of the jackpot symbol. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and the effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36), and the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game at the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half. In addition, the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

Next, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 change start process, and special figure 2 change pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) at the start of change will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the first embodiment.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target variation pattern is obtained. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the hit rate is lower than the loss rate and even one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (step A474), and if it is out of alignment (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed to perform a step. The process shifts to the A477 process, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is not out of alignment (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to the process of step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by "-1" (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1", which is a processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a processing number (step A511), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A512).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal relating to the start of fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is a signal for turning on the signal during fluctuation of Special Symbol 1. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1", which is a processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a processing number (step A521), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A522).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in special figure 2 (the signal during change in special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 2) is completed.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, and the same display time is set for the big hit symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed to end the special figure display process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process display transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A611). Step A612).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation. Further, the signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output is executed in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process transition setting process during display of the special figure is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information in the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special symbol 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the accessory continuous operating device, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Including.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is determined. (Step A706; Y), the test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the round. The number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired. Save in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A717).

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is on when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball, and is turned off when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the information of the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information The flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726) and the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A727). ) Is performed to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening opens due to the occurrence of a small hit, but the small hit occurs. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the player from being aware of the above.

Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during the small hit fanfare is performed, and the process during the special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation number update process (step A735), the effect mode information check process (step) related to the setting of the effect mode. A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation is a different value in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes (rotation speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.). It may be the same value (rotation speed) in any one of the plurality of production modes, or the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes. ) May be.

If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726, A735) in the process during display of the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step A751), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process is performed. To finish.

When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number of times for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A752), and is high. It is determined whether or not the number of probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A753; Y). Step A755). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727, A736) in the process of displaying the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode information check process of the first embodiment.

In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771), and when the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), The production mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed. For example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, etc. Is.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). The process of step A772 serves as a counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.

If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining number of rotations of the effect is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

The effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be shifted (the effect mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode transition information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information regarding the next effect mode of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). The process of step A776 is an effect mode execution control means that controls execution of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) according to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, that is, when the probability state does not change (step A780; Y), the effect mode is performed without transmitting the command to the effect control device 300. The information check process ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), save the prepared probability information command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A781), and set the effect command. The process (step A782) is performed.

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Then, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A785), an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information is checked. End the process.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / in-interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal relating to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning on one big hit signal (output by big hit + small hit) and a signal for turning on four big hit signals (output by big hit).

Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included.

After that, the information of the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag is set. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). Figure Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation that can be executed in the high probability state. Clear the information in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region that manages the number of display games (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). , Save the non-updated code in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and in order to light the display LED during right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during the small hit fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process 1, first, the processing number “7” related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one big hit signal (outputs as a big hit + a small hit).

Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare / in-interval processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A903) is performed.

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value (step A906).

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. After saving (step A907), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed in order to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A908), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed in order to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning Mouth opening information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long open, 9-16R is short open), (7) 16R, big prize opening information 7 (1) ~ 4R is set to long opening, and 5 to 16R is set to short opening).

Therefore, in the large winning opening operation judgment table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching judgment value "0" are displayed, and the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching judgment value "16" are displayed in the large winning opening opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16". , The large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, "4", which is the processing number related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening, is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process of opening the large winning opening, first, whether or not the current round is the final round is compared with the current number of rounds in the running special game state and the upper limit of the number of rounds in the RWM round number upper limit area. Is determined (step A1001).

In the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the ending command is prepared (step). A1009), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is increased. It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

When the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

After that, the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.
[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of RWM. Is determined (step A1101).

In the case of the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the large winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A1111). For example, 1.9s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the jackpot remaining ball processing is completed.

If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value. In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106), and the large winning opening opening information is displayed. If it is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A1106; Y). In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time (for example, 3.6 s) for the rank-down effect is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. , Perform the subsequent processing.

Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal regarding the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, the process number “6” related to the jackpot end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

Then, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal regarding the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). .. Then, the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is stored. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information in the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process is completed.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment.

In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. ..

Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The migration information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and the effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.

In addition, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which information on the production mode is further included in either "high probability / with time reduction" or "high probability / without time reduction". In the case of the first embodiment, since the probability change state (so-called ST state) is always reached when the big hit ends, the probability information commands include "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect". There are "Mode B", "High probability / No time saving / Production mode C", and "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", which are not used in this process, but "Low probability / No time reduction / Production mode A" , "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode B", "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode C".

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and the effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a time saving state occurs after the jackpot ends (step). A1216).

When the time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.
If the time saving state does not occur after the jackpot ends (step A1216; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1217), the effect command setting process (step A1218) is performed, and then the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed to end the jackpot end process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal regarding no time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 2 signal.

Next, the signal relating to the start without the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. It includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data region (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is completed.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal relating to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning on the jackpot 2 signal. Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.

The signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is then saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal. Includes a signal to turn on, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number with the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Special figure High probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1242).

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot includes, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal for turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal for turning off the jackpot 4 signal.

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signals related to the end of the jackpot are a signal for turning off the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, a signal for turning off the signal for hitting the special symbol 1, and a signal for turning off the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare processing during the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle processing, the small hit middle processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.
[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting processing (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, "8", which is the processing number related to the small hit medium processing, is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information of the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit medium processing transition setting process is terminated.
[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing, first, the small hit medium control pointer is loaded from the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). It is determined whether or not the above is the case (step A1402).

When the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit medium control pointer in the small hit medium control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed. When the value of the loaded small hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is special. Figure It is determined whether or not the probability is high (step A1406). In the determination in step A1406, the probability state is the determination target, and the time saving state is not the determination target.

When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit medium process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). When the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "0", "2", "4" (step A1411; pointer = 0,2,4), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

When the values of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 are "1", "3", and "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

The small hit operation includes a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent wait time (1500 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait. The time (1500 ms), the subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), the subsequent wait time (1500 ms), the subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). It is a series of operations of a total of 7600 ms consisting of a small hit ending time (100 ms).

In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the first large winning opening opening time elapses, and the value of the control pointer goes through the respective processes corresponding to "0" to "5". The value of the control pointer is "6". In this way, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the four opening operations of the special variable winning device 38. In the small hit operation, the small hit ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 ms, which is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms to the controlled small hit ending time of 100 ms.

During the small hit fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, during the large winning opening opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number "9" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) is performed to end the small hit remaining ball processing.
[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, "10", which is the processing number related to the small hit end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512). ).

Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting process is performed. To finish.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end process, first, the flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step). A1602). When the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

Then, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). ..

If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and the effect command setting process (step A1610) is performed. Perform A1611).

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. In addition, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. When the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and the effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

Then, the flag related to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time saving (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.

When the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to perform small. The hit end process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1632).

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit signal. Further, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 is performed. finish.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in the above-mentioned special figure game processing subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

As a result, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but a larger byte configuration may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process ends.

By writing the command data (ACTION) to the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives each of these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since the serial communication is performed by using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

In the symbol variation control process, first, the target variation control flag is set and it is checked whether or not the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not it is changing (step A1802). ..

When it is changing (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blinking control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805).

When the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is acquired (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is used for the target symbol. Save to the blinking control timer area (step A1807). The initial value of the blinking control timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the blinking control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is completed. To do.

In step A1802, when it is not changing (step A1802; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1810). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is completed. To do.

Information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game processing. There is.

[Flash control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blinking control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The blinking control timer initial value is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1, and 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1, and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 160 ms when the normal figure is in the state 1, and 120 ms when the normal figure is in the state 2.

The blinking control timer initial value is not limited to the value of the state 2 although the value of the state 2 is smaller than the value of the state 1. The blinking control timer initial value may be a value in the state 2 larger than the value in the state 1. For example, the initial value of the blinking control timer is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1, 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2, and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1. , It may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2, 120 ms when the normal figure is in the state 1, and 160 ms when the normal figure is in the state 2.

Note that state 2 is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to the state 1, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, it is in the state 2. Equivalent to.

As a result, in the batch display device 50, in addition to the status display unit 57, the game machine 10 is played by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. The status can be displayed.

Further, in the batch display device 50, the game machine 10 uses the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55 instead of the state display unit 57 to display the game state of the game machine 10. Can also be displayed. For example, the game machine 10 displays the first state on the state display unit 57 in the first period, and then displays the second state on the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the game machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) on the state display unit 57 at the time of the game state transition from the normal state to the probability fluctuation state. Further, the game machine 10 is in a gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55 when the game state such as a normal state or a probability fluctuation state is a steady state. Is notified that is in a steady state (steady state notification). The game machine 10 does not necessarily have to notify the game state by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. The game machine 10 may notify the game state by one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Further, the game machine 10 may notify a more complicated game state by combining the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. .. Further, the game machine 10 notifies a more complicated game state by combining the display modes of the state display unit 57, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. It may be. Therefore, the game machine 10 can notify the game progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sorting process of the first embodiment.

In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation group table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, or the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. Is.

In the sorting process, first, the first data of the prepared second half fluctuation group table (selection table), second half fluctuation selection table (selection table), and first half fluctuation selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "0"). ) (Step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not require, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). Step A1907), the sorting process is completed. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is displayed. The first specified distribution value is acquired (step A1903).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A1903 is obtained from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process. After subtracting and calculating a new random number value (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A1905; N), the process returns to the process of step A1903 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906).

That is, in step A1903, after acquiring the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random number value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above process is executed in step A1905 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, any one of the second half fluctuation selection table and the second half Select the variable number or the first half variable number. Then, in step A1905, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1907), and the distribution process is completed. To do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process of the first embodiment.

The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, is the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process a code without distribution (that is, "0")? Is checked (step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A2004). , It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), the process returns to the process of step A2003 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2006). That is, in step A2003, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A2005 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

The above process is executed in step A2005 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table. Then, in step A2005, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S130) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal diagram game processing of the first embodiment. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

In this normal map game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and then a general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. To do. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. Performs the process of setting the reference normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5), and performs the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) using the table. .. Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed using the game processing number.

In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and the effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Perform the normal processing (step B8) for setting the necessary information for the purpose. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal electric opening time can be set according to whether or not the time is shortened, or the normal. Performs the normal map display process (step B10), which sets the information necessary for performing the figure hit process. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "3", the normal drawing hitting process (step) for continuing the normal drawing hitting process or setting the information necessary for performing the normal power remaining ball processing. Perform B11).

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing is performed. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) is performed.

After that, a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display is prepared (step B14), and the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). To end the normal map game processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process is shifted to step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (step B102). Here, the right-handed game state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time reduction (during normal power support). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the process shifts to step B105. When the game is not in the right-handed game state (step B102; N), the left-handed command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the number of reserved normal figures is acquired, and the number of reserved normal figures is obtained. Is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) or not (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is changed. Calculate (step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N). , The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the universal power winning switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal-figure winning switch is hit, that is, whether or not the normal-figure fluctuation display game is in the hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. Is determined (step B111). Then, when it is hitting the normal drawing (step B111; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count number of the normal power counter has reached the upper limit, as a process for closing the normal power, the value of the end of operation (for example, "4") is saved by hitting the control pointer area during the normal drawing (for example, "4"). Step B115), the general figure game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general electric winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a winning prize of the normal power above the upper limit value during the hitting state of the normal drawing, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal drawing at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B111 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114. When it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a normal process of the first embodiment. In this normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121; Y), it is normal. Figure Normal process Transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal figure normal process ends. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step B122). , The hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to zero (step B123).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual, that is, the time is shortened (step B124). When the normal figure is not in high probability (step B124; N), the low probability lower limit judgment value is set (step B125), and when the normal figure is in high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit judgment value is set. Set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, "251"). Further, the low probability lower limit judgment value and the high probability lower limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251" and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1"). Compared, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability becomes larger in the high probability than in the low probability, for example, 0/251 in the low probability and 250/251 in the high probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127), and when the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value. (Step B128). In step B127, when the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), that is. In the case of a miss, the miss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the miss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the miss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Further, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B127; N, step B128; N). Step B132), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols.

Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B137), the free area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 is executed, the ranking of the normal figure holding numbers "2" to "4" that are held after the normal figure holding number "1" is executed. Is carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by "1".

Then, the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.
[Usually process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the above-mentioned normal figure normal process will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B152). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal figure will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B161). Step B162), the normal map fluctuation time (common to both low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B163). After that, the signal relating to the start of the normal map variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). The signal relating to the start of the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the changing flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B166), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the process during fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal map changing process is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B171) during the process of displaying the normal map in the above-mentioned process during the change of the normal map will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during display of the normal map, first, the process number is set to "2" (step B181) as the setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and the process number is set to the normal map game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B183). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B185), and the normal map display process transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B191), and the information in the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. The normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. 81. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B194).

Then, the hit start pointer value (any of the control pointers "0", "2", and "4") corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit middle control pointer area (step B195). The normal power release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B197) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B197) in the above-mentioned normal map display process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the intermediate processing transition setting processing per normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B202). After that, the signal relating to the start of the hit of the normal map variation display game (the signal relating to the hit of the normal map variation display game) and the signal relating to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). The signal related to the start of hitting the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the middle signal per normal symbol, and the signal related to the start of normal electric operation is a signal for turning on the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal. Is.

Next, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of prizes in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the number of winnings for the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the winning number area (step B206). Then, the flag defining the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is completed.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded normal figure hitting control pointer is the value in the normal drawing hitting control pointer upper limit area. It is determined whether or not (the value at the end of winning) has been reached (step B212).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B212; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by "+1" (step B213). , The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) is performed, and the normal process is completed. Further, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal electric operation transition setting is set. The process (step B214) is performed, and the process during normal drawing is completed.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of the first embodiment. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B221).

If the value of the control pointer is either "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B223), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the solenoid opening time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step). B224), the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the processing number in order to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B227), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Next, the normal electric operation in the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary variable winning device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

The normal electric operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms consisting of the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (500 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). It is a series of operations of. In the case of the winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the lapse of the normal electric power opening time, and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is performed after one opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 2 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal power operation is performed by the normal power display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 4800 ms, which consists of a normal electric opening time (1700 ms) and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the control pointer value becomes "2" after the first normal power release time elapses, and the control pointer value is controlled through the respective processes corresponding to "2" and "3". The value of the pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 twice.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 3 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is performed by the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the lapse of the first normal power release time, and the value of the control pointer corresponds to "0", "1", "2", and "3". The value of the control pointer becomes "4" through each of the processes. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 three times.

During the normal figure display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. Further, during the normal electric opening time, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened by the on control of the general electric solenoid 37c.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal figure game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric remaining ball processing of the first embodiment. In this normal power remaining ball processing, the normal power remaining ball processing is completed by performing the normal drawing end processing transition setting process (step B231).

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the end process transition setting process (step B231) per normal figure in the above-mentioned ordinary electric remaining ball processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing transition setting processing per normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this per-figure end processing transition setting process, first, the process number "5" related to the per-figure end process is set (step B241), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B242). ).

After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B243), and the signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Next, the information in the normal electric count number area for counting the number of prizes won in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B246), and the end process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the end process per normal figure (step B13) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing per normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hit end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed to end the normal figure hit end process.

[Usually process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "0" related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B261), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B262). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). The signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal symbol fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

After that, the flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the Fudaden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the segment LED editing process of the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to driving of the round display unit 51 provided in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the LEDs constituting the status display unit 57, etc. To do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, "1" is added to the blinking control timer to update it (step C11). The blinking control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display is determined (step C12), and when the output is on timing (step C12; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing is set. If not (step C12; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C14). It should be noted that the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display can be determined by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, the blinking cycle of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms.

After that, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved numbers of the normal figure is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table 1 or the number of reserved normal figures display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing the display data of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

For example, the normal figure hold number display table 1 and the normal figure hold number display table 2 have the same value for the normal figure hold numbers "0" to "2", but different values for the normal figure hold numbers "3" and "4". Is. As a result, in the normal figure hold display unit 56, the corresponding LED is turned off when the normal figure hold number is "0", the corresponding LED is turned on when the normal figure hold number is "1", and the normal figure hold number is "3". , "4" realizes the blinking of the corresponding LED.

Next, the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and when the output is on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C18). It should be noted that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C19). It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold display unit 52 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Next, the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display is determined (step C20), and when the output is on timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C22). It should be noted that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 2 hold number display table 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C25). ..

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C27).
In addition, the game state display table 1 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is during the time saving (during the support of the public train), in other words, whether or not it is one of the game states that is advantageous to the player. A display mode for the display unit 57 to notify is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, "normal" is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, "special time reduction (during normal power support)" is notified.

After that, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is completed.

The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not the game state is another game state that is advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notifying. For example, when the LED_30 in the status display unit 57 is turned off, "normal hit (left hit)" is notified, and when the LED_30 is turned on, "right hit" is notified. It should be noted that the period for notifying "right-handed" includes a period corresponding to a gaming state such as during a big hit, during a small hit, and during normal electric support.

As a result, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game according to the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the special figure 2 hold display unit 58, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the state display unit, which are the display modes to be set by the segment LED editing process. The 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activity will be described. A fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a game value may be performed on a game machine that gives a player a predetermined game value according to the result of the game. Among such fraudulent acts, a game machine provided with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activity, and detection methods and conditions are required according to each type. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be detected accurately.

In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal condition has occurred even though no abnormal condition leading to fraudulent activity has occurred and giving a notification, etc., causes distrust of the player and is a factor of repelling the game in the game machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent such false detection of abnormal conditions.

Therefore, the game machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of doing so, for example, to prevent erroneous detection of an abnormal state, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, which is a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be paraphrased as a magnet sensor.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. Whether or not it is determined (step C31). When the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, "1" is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed up (step C33).

The abnormality is determined when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms). When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region is determined. Determine (step C43).

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time is specified. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet fraud notification timer to update (step C39). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C33; N), the process proceeds to step C39.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraud notification period ends, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been performed from, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step C41). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step C44), the effect command setting process is performed (step C45), and the magnet illegal monitoring process is completed. To do.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 that forms a radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

Then, a command for illegally notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step C53), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C54), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred only when the panel radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave once.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step C51; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0". "1" is subtracted from the timer to update (step C55). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraudulent notification period is over, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been sent from, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step C57), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C58), and prepare the board radio wave fraud. It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value in the radio wave invalid flag area (step C59).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), the effect command setting process is performed (step C61), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, the game machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but by determining that it is in an abnormal state when magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time, the magnetism of the solenoid or the like is determined. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the occurrence as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the game machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining an abnormal state when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

In the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected, but a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a non-abnormal state may be detected, and is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. The state in which magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal radio waves is simply set to the state of receiving radio waves, but it is possible to receive radio waves of a strength that is not received in a non-abnormal state or in a non-abnormal state. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of a frequency that does not exist. Further, a state in which a radio wave having an intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave having a specific frequency may be detected may be regarded as an abnormality. When setting the threshold value by the magnetic strength, the radio wave strength, and the frequency, the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold value is exceeded, or the control device side sets the threshold value. You may want to monitor if it is exceeded.

From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio detector (panel radio sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector Originally, an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state is provided, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time. In some cases, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred, but in the case of a radio detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), general power fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or a big prize is awarded. When the mouth fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general electric wave fraud, or grand prize opening fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is tested. Save to the signal output data area (step C87).

Next, in the external information editing process, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. To do. Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step C91).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is set to the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Is a process to output to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0" (step C103).

When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is not "0" (step C103; N), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is set to the main. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is the time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106; Y), the process shifts to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C106; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts is transmitted to the outside. It should be noted that, after the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. From the time when the payout condition is satisfied to the time when the payout number of game media is paid out, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

That is, the game control device 100 can output information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the number of game media to be paid out. It serves as an external output means.

However, if the number of prize balls generated is small and the number is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) even if this is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, information on the planned number of game media payouts after the actual payout is completed. May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, "1"), the payout condition is always satisfied until the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information regarding the number of planned game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the game machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the payout number of game media is paid out. An external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information regarding the planned number of game media payouts to the outside is provided. It is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on the storage means (game control device 100) provided with a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout conditions. The addition means (game control device 100) for adding the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to the established payout conditions to the game medium storage area and the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area have reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside and the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. It is provided with a subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) for each payout schedule of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and from "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16". And keep "OFF" until the value of the output control timer becomes "0". That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal consisting of a 128 ms “ON” time and a 64 ms “OFF” time.

Unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. As a result, the game machine 10 can make the external device confirm the consistency between the payout schedule of the game medium and the payout result of the game medium, and can deal with the illegal payout.

Further, in the winning during the big hit period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to the ball running out or the like and the game medium is paid out after the big hit is completed, the external device may use only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on a prize during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that the external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step C89) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a start port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by "-1" (step C114), and the start port signal is output to the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal (for example, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is completed. When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116; Y), the process shifts to step C117. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C116; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C116; N). Step C118), the start port signal editing process is completed.

Next, the variation display modes of the special figure 1 and the normal figure will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 106. As described with reference to FIG. 5, the batch display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31, and 8 LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13 constitute the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. The normal symbol display unit 55 is composed of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. Therefore, the number of LEDs in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is larger than the number of LEDs in the normal symbol display unit 55.

Here, the display mode of the special figure 1 displayed by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display of the special figure 1 in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 1, and is represented by a lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 in the state 1 are from lighting pattern 1 to lighting pattern 8. The stop pattern is a display mode of the fluctuation result of the special figure 1, and there are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256 ways).

The display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is an update interval every 80 ms in the order of lighting pattern 1, lighting pattern 2, lighting pattern 3, lighting pattern 4, lighting pattern 5, lighting pattern 6, lighting pattern 7, and lighting pattern 8. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 in the state 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 1 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 2 is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 3 is "OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 4 is "ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 5 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 3. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 6 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 2. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 7 is the same as that in the lighting pattern 1. Then, in the lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 8, all of the LEDs _06 to _13 are "OFF".

That is, the changing display mode of FIG. 1 has a lighting mode that overlaps with other changing displays in some of the changing displays. For example, the lighting pattern 1 and the lighting pattern 7, the lighting pattern 2 and the lighting pattern 6, and the lighting pattern 3 and the lighting pattern 5 each have overlapping lighting modes. On the other hand, the changing display mode of FIG. 1 has a different lighting mode in the time-series continuous changing display mode. For example, the lighting pattern 2 has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 1, and has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 3.

In such a display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4, and the lit LED moves from right to left to notify the fluctuation of the special figure 1. .. Further, as for the display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are notified in the lighting pattern 4 to the lighting pattern 7 so that the lit LED moves from left to right to notify the fluctuation of the special figure 1. As for the display mode during the change of the special figure 1, the LED_10 to the LED_13 notify the change of the special figure 1 by moving the lit LED from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4. Further, as for the display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are notified from the lighting pattern 4 to the lighting pattern 7 so that the lit LED moves from right to left to notify the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 to the player. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, as described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates to the player the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the changing display mode of the special drawing 1, so that the player can display the special drawing 1 during the change. By observing the aspect, it becomes easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

Next, the display mode of the normal figure displayed by the normal symbol display unit 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display of a normal diagram in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

The normal drawing includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a display mode during the fluctuation of the normal drawing, and is represented by the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting patterns are from lighting pattern 1 to lighting pattern 4. The stop pattern is a display mode of the fluctuation result of the normal map, and there are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 16 patterns).

The display mode during the fluctuation of the normal diagram changes in the order of lighting pattern 1, lighting pattern 2, lighting pattern 3, and lighting pattern 4 at update intervals of 160 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern in the normal figure is 640 ms (= 160 ms × 4).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 1 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 2 is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 3 is "OFF, ON, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 4 is "ON, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

That is, the changing display mode of the normal drawing has a lighting mode in which a part of the changing display does not overlap with the other changing display. As a matter of course, the changing display mode of the normal figure has a different lighting mode in the continuous changing display mode in time series. For example, the lighting pattern 2 has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 1, and has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 3.

In such a display mode during the fluctuation of the normal map, LEDs_24 to LED_27 notify the changing of the normal map by moving the lit LED from right to left in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4.

As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the normal symbol display unit 55 to the player. For example, the normal symbol display unit 55 displays the stop pattern of the normal symbol for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the normal symbol display unit 55 from the stop pattern. However, as described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the normal symbol display unit 55 to the player by the display mode during the change of the normal map, so that the player observes the display mode during the change of the normal map. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the normal symbol display unit 55.

Next, the coincidences and differences between the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the normal figure in the state 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a comparative example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the normal figure in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

In the comparative example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the normal drawing, LEDs_06 to LED_13 and LEDs_24 to LED_27 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the lighting modes of the changing LEDs are arranged in the vertical direction in chronological order. ..

According to this, the variable display of FIG. 1 can be divided into the first half of LED_06 to LED_09, the second half of LED_06 to LED_09, the first half of LED_10 to LED_13, and the second half of LED_10 to LED_13. These divided special figure 1 fluctuation indications are shown in the four ranges surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line. Of these, the first half of LEDs_06 to LED_09 is a special figure 1 changing display (part) that can be compared with the changing display of the normal drawing.

Further, although the changing display of the normal drawing has a different update timing from the changing display of the special figure 1, the changing display of LED_24 and LED_27 is the same as the first half of LED_06 to LED_09. The display during fluctuation of the normal map is shown in one range surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

That is, the changing display of the normal map and the changing display of the special figure 1 (part) have a common changing display (specific changing display). In other words, the changing display of the normal map is entirely composed of the specified changing display, and the changing display of the special figure 1 is partially composed of the specified changing display. With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to compare and contrast the changing display of the normal map and the changing display of the special figure 1 (part).

At this time, since the update timings of the special figure 1 and the normal figure are different (the special figure 1 is 80 ms and the normal figure is 160 ms), the game machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that each has a different symbol. Further, since the update cycle of the special figure 1 and the update cycle of the normal figure match (both are 640 ms), in the game machine 10, the range of the lighting pattern 1 cycle of the normal figure is the range of the lighting pattern 1 cycle of the special figure 1. Can be clearly shown to the player. In this way, the game machine 10 can realize the distinction between the special figure 1 and the normal figure by making the number of LEDs and the update interval different between the special figure 1 and the normal figure.

It should be noted that the game machine 10 not only helps the player to understand the progress of the game by clearly indicating the distinction between the special figure 1 and the normal figure, but also improves the visibility when the player confirms the progress of the game. improves. In addition, the game machine 10 can arrange the display mode of the batch display device 50, which tends to be cluttered, and can improve the aesthetics and design of the game machine 10. In addition, since the game machine 10 arranges the display mode of the batch display device 50, the fatigue when the player confirms the progress of the game is reduced.

Next, the changing display of the special figure 1 in the state 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display of the special figure 1 in the state 2 of the first embodiment.
The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 in the state 2 are from the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 18. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256).

The display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is an update interval every 60 ms in the order of lighting pattern 11, lighting pattern 12, lighting pattern 13, lighting pattern 14, lighting pattern 15, lighting pattern 16, lighting pattern 17, and lighting pattern 18. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 in the state 2 is 480 ms (= 60 ms × 8).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 11 is "ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 12 is "ON, ON, OFF, ON, ON, OFF, ON, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 13 is "ON, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 14 is "OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 15 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 16 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 12. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 17 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 11. Then, in the lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 18, all of the LEDs _06 to _13 are "ON".

That is, the display mode during the change of the special figure 1 in the state 2 is different from the display mode during the change of the special figure 1 in the state 1 in the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern. As a result, the game machine 10 can display the game state of the game machine 10 in place of the state display unit 57, or in addition to the state display unit 57, on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

In such a display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14, and the LED to be turned off moves from right to left to notify the fluctuation of the special figure 1. .. Further, as for the display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are in the lighting pattern 14 to the lighting pattern 17, and the LED to be turned off moves from the left to the right to notify the fluctuation of the special drawing 1. As for the display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the LED_10 to the LED_13 are in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14, and the LED to be turned off moves from the left to the right to notify the fluctuation of the special drawing 1. Further, as for the display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are in the lighting pattern 14 to the lighting pattern 17, and the LED to be turned off moves from right to left to notify the fluctuation of the special drawing 1.

As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 to the player even in the state 2. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, as described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates to the player the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the changing display mode of the special drawing 1, so that the player can display the special drawing 1 during the change. By observing the aspect, it becomes easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

In the first embodiment, the lighting mode of the LED during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the update timing of the lighting pattern are different, and the state 1 and the state 2 are clearly shown to be distinguishable. The state 1 and the state 2 may be clearly distinguished by either one of the lighting mode of the LED inside and the update timing of the lighting pattern.

Next, the display mode of the normal figure in the state 2 displayed by the normal symbol display unit 55 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display of a normal diagram in the state 2 of the first embodiment.

The lighting patterns in the normal drawing in the state 2 are from the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 16 patterns).
The display mode during the fluctuation of the normal diagram in the state 2 changes in the order of the lighting pattern 11, the lighting pattern 12, the lighting pattern 13, and the lighting pattern 14 at an update interval of 120 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern in the normal figure is 480 ms (= 120 ms × 4).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 11 is “ON, ON, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 12 is "ON, ON, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 13 is "ON, OFF, ON, ON" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 14 is "OFF, ON, ON, ON" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

That is, the display mode during the fluctuation of the normal map in the state 2 is different from the display mode during the change of the normal map in the state 1 in the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern. As a result, the game machine 10 can display the game state of the game machine 10 in place of the state display unit 57, or in addition to the state display unit 57, on the normal symbol display unit 55.

In such a display mode during the fluctuation of the normal map, the LEDs _24 to LED_27 are in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14, and the LED to be turned off moves from right to left to notify the fluctuation of the normal map.

As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the normal symbol display unit 55 to the player. For example, the normal symbol display unit 55 displays the stop pattern of the normal symbol for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the normal symbol display unit 55 from the stop pattern. However, as described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the normal symbol display unit 55 to the player by the display mode during the change of the normal map, so that the player observes the display mode during the change of the normal map. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the normal symbol display unit 55.

In the first embodiment, the lighting mode of the LED during the fluctuation of the normal diagram and the update timing of the lighting pattern are differently specified so that the state 1 and the state 2 can be distinguished from each other. The state 1 and the state 2 may be clearly distinguished by either one of the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern.

[Modified example of the first embodiment]
Next, the coincidences and differences between the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the normal figure in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a comparative example of the changing display (variation example) of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment and the changing display (variation example) of the normal drawing.

Unlike the batch display device 50 of the first embodiment, the batch display device 50 of the modified example of the first embodiment comprises two LEDs, LED_06 and LED_07, to form the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and the LED_24 The general symbol display unit 55 is composed of one LED. Therefore, even in the modified example of the first embodiment, the number of LEDs in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is larger than the number of LEDs in the normal symbol display unit 55.

In a comparative example of the changing display (transformed example) of the special figure 1 and the changing display (transformed example) of the normal drawing, LEDs_06, LED_07, and LED_24 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the lighting modes of the changing LEDs are arranged in time series. They are arranged vertically.

According to this, the changing display (modification example) of the special figure 1 can be divided into a changing display of LED_06 and a changing display of LED_07. These divided special figure 1 fluctuation indications are shown in the two ranges surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line. Of these, the changing display of LED_06 is a special figure 1 changing display (part) that can be compared with the changing display of the normal map.

Further, the changing display of LED_24 is the same as the changing display of LED_06, and the update timing of the changing display is also the same (for example, the changing display is updated every 128 ms). The display during fluctuation of the normal map is shown in one range surrounded by the two-dot chain line.

That is, the changing display of the normal map and the changing display of the special figure 1 (part) have a common changing display (specific changing display). In other words, the changing display of the normal map is entirely composed of the specified changing display, and the changing display of the special figure 1 is partially composed of the specified changing display. With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to compare and contrast the changing display of the normal map and the changing display of the special figure 1 (part). In this way, even when the number of LEDs in the special figure 1 is two and the number of LEDs in the normal figure is one, the display during the fluctuation of the normal figure and the display during the change of the special figure 1 (part) You can set a common variable display with.

In addition, the game machine 10 improves the visibility when the player confirms the progress of the game by setting the display during change common to the special figure 1 and the normal figure. In addition, the game machine 10 can arrange the display mode of the batch display device 50, which tends to be cluttered, and can improve the aesthetics and design of the game machine 10. In addition, since the game machine 10 arranges the display mode of the batch display device 50, the fatigue when the player confirms the progress of the game is reduced.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 is provided with a batch display device 50 on the front side. The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (first variable display game display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 55 (second variable display game display unit). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight lighting pattern display (result derivation display) and stop pattern display (result display) of the first special figure variation display game (first variation display game) (first number). ) LED (indicator light). In addition, the normal symbol symbol display unit 55 displays the lighting pattern display (result derivation display) and the stop pattern display (result display) of the result derivation display and the result display of the normal figure variation display game (second variation display game). Is displayed by four (second number) LEDs (indicator lights).

The combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the normal figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game includes the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, the second special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, or other. It may be a combination of variable display games.

(2) The first variable display game display unit updates the display mode of the result derivation of the first variable display game (display during fluctuation) at the first update interval (for example, 80 ms), and the second variable display. The game display unit updates the display mode of the result-deriving display of the second variable display game at a second update interval (for example, 160 ms) different from the first update interval.

(3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display mode of the third number (for example, eight patterns) of the result derivation of the first variable display game, and the second variable display game display unit displays the result. The display mode of the result-deriving display of the second variable display game is sequentially updated with a fourth number (for example, four patterns) different from the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game and one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game are the same.
(5) The result derivation display of the first variable display game and the result derivation display of the second variable display game include a common variable display.

(6) The result derivation display of the first variable display game and the result derivation display of the second variable display game have a relationship in which one of the variable display includes the other variable display.
[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. In the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the functional distribution of the batch display device 50 is different from that of the first embodiment.

First, the functional distribution of the batch display device 50 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of functional distribution of the batch display device of the first embodiment.
In the first embodiment, the batch display device 50 distributes the notification functions of LED_00 to LED_31 according to the functional distribution pattern 1. In the second embodiment, the batch display device 50 distributes the notification functions of LED_00 to LED_31 according to the functional distribution pattern 2. For example, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment is the model "AAA", and the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is the model "BBB". In this way, the batch display device 50 is commonly used by a plurality of models, and the notification functions of LED_00 to LED_31 are assigned to each model.

The game machine 10 of the second embodiment is a model having so-called 1 type + 2 types of game characteristics, has 1 type of game characteristics according to Special Figure 1, and has 2 types of game characteristics according to Special Figure 2. Have. In such a game machine 10, special figure 2 generally does not have a hold memory of a variable display game.

The batch display device 50 according to the functional distribution pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the second embodiment.
The batch display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The batch display device 50 displays various states depending on the lighting mode of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

By allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 51, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a. A normal symbol symbol display unit 55a, a normal figure hold display unit 56a, and a status display unit 57a are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting modes of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the 10 LEDs from LED_14 to LED_23. The normal symbol display unit 55a displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs, LED_24 to LED_26. The normal figure hold display unit 56a displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_27 and LED_28. The state display unit 57a displays the game state in the special figure game according to the lighting modes of the three LEDs, LED_29 to LED_31.

Next, the display mode of the special figure 1 and the display mode of the special figure 2 displayed by the batch display device 50 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. As described with reference to FIG. 109, the batch display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31, and the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13 constitute the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a is composed of 10 LEDs from LED_14 to LED_23. Therefore, the number of LEDs in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is smaller than the number of LEDs in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a. In other words, the special figure 2 without the hold memory uses more LEDs than the special figure 1 with the hold memory to notify the lighting pattern and the stop pattern.

First, the display mode of the special figure 1 displayed by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display of the special figure 1 of the second embodiment.
FIG. 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 1, and is represented by a lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 are from the lighting pattern 21 to the lighting pattern 28. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256).

The display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is an update interval every 80 ms in the order of lighting pattern 21, lighting pattern 22, lighting pattern 23, lighting pattern 24, lighting pattern 25, lighting pattern 26, lighting pattern 27, and lighting pattern 28. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 21 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 22 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 23 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 24 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 25 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 26 is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 27 is "OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 28 is "ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

That is, the changing display mode of FIG. 1 has a lighting mode that does not overlap with other changing displays in all the changing displays.
In such a display mode during the change of FIG. 1, the LED_06 to LED_13 notify the change of the special figure 1 in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 8 so that the lit LED moves from right to left. .. In such a variation mode, all the LEDs are turned on and off once or more in one cycle (lighting pattern 21 to lighting pattern 28). As a result, the game machine 10 can easily detect an LED failure or malfunction in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

Further, the lighting patterns 21 to 28 have a relationship of one LED that lights up and seven LEDs that turn off, and this ratio is constant during the variable display. Therefore, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 clearly indicates that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the special figure 1 according to the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

Further, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 to the player. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, as described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates to the player the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the changing display mode of the special drawing 1, so that the player can display the special drawing 1 during the change. By observing the aspect, it becomes easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53.

Next, the display mode of the special figure 2 displayed by the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display of the special figure 2 of the second embodiment.
Special figure 2 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 2, and is represented by the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_14 to LED_23. The lighting patterns range from the lighting pattern 21 to the lighting pattern 24. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 1024 patterns).

The display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 2 alternates between the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22 at an update interval of every 160 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 2 is 320 ms (= 160 ms × 2).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 21 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON" in the order of LED_14 to LED_23. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 22 is "ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

Further, the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22 have a relationship of 5 LEDs that are turned on and 5 LEDs that are turned off, respectively, and this ratio is constant during the variable display. Therefore, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a clearly indicates that the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the special figure 2 according to the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

That is, the changing display mode of FIG. 2 has a lighting mode in which a part of the changing display does not overlap with the other changing display. As a matter of course, the changing display mode of FIG. 2 has different lighting modes in the continuous changing display mode in time series. Further, the display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 2 is such that the LED_14 to the LED_23 are alternately lit in the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22.

In such a display mode during the change of the special figure 2, the LED_14 to the LED_23 repeat the lighting pattern 21 and the lighting pattern 22 to notify the change of the special figure 2.
Further, since the number of LEDs used for notification is larger in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1, many lighting patterns are prepared according to the number of LEDs (for example, the LED that lights as in the special figure 1). If the lighting pattern is such that one cycle is completed, one cycle becomes excessive. An excessive cycle makes it difficult to achieve both rapid game progress and notification to the player. Therefore, in the special figure 2, one cycle is shortened by a smaller lighting pattern than in the special figure 1, and the update interval of the lighting pattern is increased as compared with the special figure 1, so that the game progresses quickly and the player is notified. We are trying to be compatible with notification. Further, since the number of stop patterns in the special figure 2 can be larger than that in the special figure 1 (the maximum number of the special figure 1 is 256 and the maximum number of the special figure 2 is 1024), the gaming machine 10 is diverse. It is possible to improve the interest by presenting the game result to the player. From another point of view, since the game machine 10 presents various game results to the player, it is an opportunity to make it difficult to aim at the game result by unfair means and obtain a game value for a good player. Can be equalized.

Further, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a to the player. For example, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the stop pattern of the special figure 2 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a from the stop pattern. However, as described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates to the player the area of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a by the changing display mode of the special drawing 2, so that the player can display the special drawing 2 during the change. By observing the aspect, it becomes easy to grasp the stop pattern in the region of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 is provided with a batch display device 50 on the front side. The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (first variable display game display unit) and a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a (second variable display game display unit). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight lighting pattern display (result derivation display) and stop pattern display (result display) of the first special figure variation display game (first variation display game) (first number). ) LED (indicator light). In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the lighting pattern display (result derivation display) and the stop pattern display (result) of the result derivation display and the result display of the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game). (Display) is displayed by 10 (second number) LEDs (indicator lights).

The combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is the first special figure variable display game and the normal figure variable display game, the second special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, or other variable display. It may be a combination of games.

(2) The first variable display game display unit updates the display mode of the result derivation of the first variable display game (display during fluctuation) at the first update interval (for example, 80 ms), and the second variable display. The game display unit updates the display mode of the result-deriving display of the second variable display game at a second update interval (for example, 160 ms) different from the first update interval.

(3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display mode of the third number (for example, eight patterns) of the result derivation of the first variable display game, and the second variable display game display unit displays the result. The display mode of the result-deriving display of the second variable display game is sequentially updated with a fourth number (for example, two patterns) different from the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game and one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game are different.
(5) The first variable display game is a variable display game having a hold memory, and the second variable display game is a variable display game having no hold memory.

(6) The second variable display game has a larger number of stop pattern displays (result display) than the first variable display game.
(7) The second update interval is larger than the first update interval.

(8) The first variation display game is a sequential lighting pattern display (display during result derivation) in which three or more lighting patterns are prepared, and the second variation display game is lighting by alternating switching in which two lighting patterns are prepared. It is a pattern display (display during result derivation).

(9) In the first variable display game result derivation display and the second variable display game result derivation display, the ratio of the number of LED lights to the number of lights off (lighting ratio) is constant, respectively, and the first variable display game The lighting ratio in the result derivation in-progress display and the lighting ratio in the result derivation in-progress display of the second variable display game are different from each other.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. In the game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, the functional distribution of the batch display device 50 is different from that of the first embodiment.

First, the batch display device 50 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to a first modification of the second embodiment.
The batch display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The batch display device 50 displays various states depending on the lighting mode of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b, and a display unit thereof by allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting modes of eight LEDs of LED_02 to LED_04, LEDs_10 to LED_12, LED_20, and LED_21. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54a displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting modes of eight LEDs of LED_07 to LED_09, LEDs_17 to LED_19, LED_27, and LED_28.

Next, the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the special figure 2 of the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b displays the display mode during the change of the special figure 1. The display mode during the change of FIG. 1 alternates between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B at an update interval of every 80 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 is 160 ms (= 80 ms × 2).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting mode A is "ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" for LED_02 to LED_04, LED_10 to LED_12, LED_20, and LED_21, respectively. The LED lighting mode in the lighting mode B is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, ON" for LEDs_02 to LED_04, LEDs_10 to LED_12, LED_20, and LED_21, respectively.

As described above, in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B have a relationship of three LEDs that are turned on and five LEDs that are turned off, and this ratio is constant during the variable display. is there. Therefore, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b clearly indicates that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b displays the special figure 1 according to the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b displays the display mode during the change of the special figure 1. The display mode during the change of FIG. 2 alternates between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B at an update interval of every 80 ms. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 2 is 160 ms (= 80 ms × 2).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting mode A is "OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" for LED_07 to LED_09, LED_17 to LED_19, LED_27, and LED_28, respectively. The LED lighting mode in the lighting mode B is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF" for LEDs_07 to LED_09, LEDs_17 to LED_19, LED_27, and LED_28, respectively.

As described above, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B have a relationship of two LEDs that are turned on and six LEDs that are turned off.
As described above, in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b, the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B have a relationship of two LEDs that are turned on and six LEDs that are turned off, and this ratio is constant during the variable display. is there. Therefore, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b clearly indicates that the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b displays the special figure 2 according to the lighting ratio of the LED during the variable display.

Further, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b are alternately lit at the boundary between the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b, thereby forming the boundary between them. Clarify. For example, LED_02, LED_10, and LED_20 are located in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b and adjacent to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b, and LED_09 and LED_19 are located in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b. It is located adjacent to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b.

Then, when LED_02, LED_10, and LED_20 are each "ON", LED_09 and LED_19 are "OFF", respectively (lighting mode A). Further, when LED_02, LED_10, and LED_20 are each "OFF", LED_09 and LED_19 are "ON", respectively (lighting mode B). As a result, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b clearly indicate that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b displays the special figure 1 depending on the lighting mode of the LED during the variable display. FIG. 2 It is clearly indicated that the symbol display unit 54b displays the special figure 2.

In addition, such a game machine 10 can arrange the display mode of the batch display device 50, which tends to be cluttered, and can improve the aesthetic appearance and design of the game machine 10. In addition, since the game machine 10 arranges the display mode of the batch display device 50, the fatigue when the player confirms the progress of the game is reduced.

The game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 is provided with a batch display device 50 on the front side. The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53b (first variable display game display unit) and a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b (second variable display game display unit). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight lighting pattern display (result derivation display) and stop pattern display (result display) of the first special figure variation display game (first variation display game) (first number). ) LED (indicator light). In addition, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54b displays the lighting pattern display (result derivation display) and the stop pattern display (result) of the result derivation display and the result display of the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game). (Display) is displayed by 8 (second number) LEDs (indicator lights).

The combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is the first special figure variable display game and the normal figure variable display game, the second special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game, or other variable display. It may be a combination of games.

(2) The first variable display game display unit updates the display mode of the result derivation of the first variable display game (display during fluctuation) at the first update interval (for example, 80 ms), and the second variable display. The game display unit updates the display mode of the result-deriving display of the second variable display game at the same update interval as the first update interval.

(3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display mode of the third number (for example, two patterns) in the result derivation of the first variable display game, and the second variable display game display unit The display mode of the result-deriving display of the second variable display game is sequentially updated by the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game and one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game are the same.
(5) In the first variable display game result derivation display and the second variable display game result derivation display, the ratio of the number of LED lights to the number of lights off (lighting ratio) is constant, respectively, and the first variable display game The lighting ratio in the result derivation in-progress display and the lighting ratio in the result derivation in-progress display of the second variable display game are different from each other.

(6) The first variable display game display unit and the second variable display game display unit are adjacent to each other at their respective boundary areas, and are in the boundary area between the result derivation display and the second variable display game in the boundary area of the first variable display game. The display during the derivation of the result is in a relationship of alternately lighting.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment, the lighting pattern in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is different from that of the first embodiment. The display mode of the special figure 1 displayed by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the changing display of the special figure 1 of the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

FIG. 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 1, and is represented by a lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 are from a lighting pattern 31 to a lighting pattern 38. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256 ways), and one stop pattern (off) and the remaining stop patterns (other than off) are included. The lighting mode of the stop pattern (off) is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

The display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is an update interval every 80 ms in the order of lighting pattern 31, lighting pattern 32, lighting pattern 33, lighting pattern 34, lighting pattern 35, lighting pattern 36, lighting pattern 37, lighting pattern 38. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 31 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 32 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 33 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 34 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 35 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 36 is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 37 is "OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 38 is "ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

That is, the changing display mode of FIG. 1 has a lighting mode that does not overlap with other changing displays in all the changing displays. Further, the lighting pattern 31 is a lighting mode at the start of fluctuation in the sequential lighting pattern display, and is common to the lighting mode of the stop pattern (off).

In this way, by setting the lighting pattern 31 common to the lighting mode of the stop pattern (disengagement) to the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation, the game machine 10 is continuous from the frequently occurring stop pattern (disengagement). Variable display can be performed in a certain lighting mode. In addition, the game machine 10 facilitates the dissemination of the stop pattern (off) to the player.

Further, in the sequential lighting pattern display, the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation is the lighting mode most frequently used. Further, in general, the lighting mode of the stop pattern (off) is also the most frequently used lighting mode among the stop patterns. Such a frequently used lighting mode is expected to be a lighting mode with a high failure frequency. Therefore, the game machine 10 can easily find a failure or malfunction of the LED that displays the stop pattern (disengagement).

The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 is provided with a batch display device 50 on the front side. The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (variable display game display unit). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays a predetermined number of lighting pattern displays (display during result derivation) of the first special figure variation display game (first variation display game) while sequentially updating. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 sets the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation in the lighting pattern display to be the same lighting mode as the most frequently used stop pattern display (result display).

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in the lighting mode of the stop pattern (disengagement). The display mode of the special figure 1 displayed by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of the changing display of the special figure 1 of the modified example 3 of the second embodiment.

FIG. 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a display mode during the fluctuation of FIG. 1, and is represented by a lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 are from a lighting pattern 41 to a lighting pattern 48. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 256 ways), and one stop pattern (off) and the remaining stop patterns (other than off) are included. The lighting mode of the stop pattern (off) is "ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

The display mode during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is an update interval every 80 ms in the order of lighting pattern 41 to lighting pattern 42, lighting pattern 43, lighting pattern 44, lighting pattern 45, lighting pattern 46, lighting pattern 47, lighting pattern 48. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 41 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 42 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 43 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 44 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 45 is "OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The LED lighting mode in the lighting pattern 46 is "OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 47 is "OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 48 is "ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF" in the order of LED_06 to LED_13.

That is, the changing display mode of FIG. 1 has a lighting mode that does not overlap with other changing displays in all the changing displays. Further, the lighting pattern 48 is a lighting mode at the start of fluctuation in the sequential lighting pattern display, and is common to the lighting mode of the stop pattern (off).

As described above, the lighting pattern 48 common to the lighting mode of the stop pattern (off) is set to a lighting mode other than the start of fluctuation, and preferably a lighting mode to be updated at the timing farthest from the start of fluctuation.

In the sequential lighting pattern display, the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation is the lighting mode most frequently used during fluctuation. Further, in general, the lighting mode of the stop pattern (off) is the most frequently used lighting mode among the stop patterns. By differentiating the most frequently used lighting mode and the most frequently used lighting mode among the stop patterns during such fluctuations, the game machine 10 is overloaded with a specific LED and fails early. To prevent that.

The game machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 is provided with a batch display device 50 on the front side. The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (variable display game display unit). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays a predetermined number of lighting pattern displays (display during result derivation) of the first special figure variation display game (first variation display game) while sequentially updating. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 sets the lighting mode at the start of fluctuation in the lighting pattern display to a lighting mode different from the most frequently used stop pattern display (result display).

(2) The game machine 10 has a lighting mode in which the most frequently used stop pattern display (result display) is updated at the timing farthest from the start of fluctuation in the lighting pattern display.
[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 131. The game machine 10 of the third embodiment alerts the player to the game and directs the game by the light emitting unit. First, the arrangement of the light emitting portion on the front side of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the light emitting unit in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 includes light emitting units L00 to L0B on the front frame 12. The light emitting units L00 to L0B are arranged in an arc shape on the front frame 12 so as to surround the game board 30. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L0B form a first arc-shaped light emitting group arranged in an arc on the outer edge side of the game board 30.

The light emitting units L00 to L05 are provided on the front frame 12. Specifically, the light emitting units L00 to L0B are provided in the frame decoration device 18 on the left side of the glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15, and the light emitting units L06 to L0B are provided in the frame decoration device 18 on the right side of the front frame 12. .. The light emitting units L00 to L0B can sequentially switch a plurality of light emitting colors to emit light, and are, for example, full-color LEDs. Further, the light emitting units L00 to L0B may include a lamp for notification (for example, for notification of payout abnormality) arranged at a predetermined portion. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L0B are constituent elements of the front frame (main body frame) 12 that can correspond to the game boards 30 of different game models. Therefore, the game machine 10 controls the light emitting units L00 to L0B in a common light emitting mode that does not depend on the game model, and realizes a common notification mode in different game models by using the light emitting units L00 to L0B.

The game machine 10 includes light emitting units L10 to L17 on the game board 30. The light emitting units L10 to L17 are arranged in an arc on the game board 30 so as to surround the display device 41. That is, the light emitting units L10 to L17 form a second arc-shaped light emitting group arranged in an arc on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The light emitting units L10 to L17 are provided on one or more of the game board constituent members such as the center case 40, the board effect device 44, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. The light emitting units L10 to L17 can sequentially switch a plurality of light emitting colors to emit light, and are, for example, full-color LEDs.

That is, the light emitting units L10 to L17 are components of the game board 30 depending on the game model. Therefore, the game machine 10 controls the light emitting units L10 to L17 in a light emitting mode peculiar to the game model, and realizes a notification mode peculiar to the game model by using the light emitting units L10 to L17.

The game machine 10 includes an option setting unit 25 located on the upper plate 21, and the option setting unit 25 also includes a plurality of light emitting units. These plurality of light emitting units are arranged in an arc shape on the option setting unit 25. That is, the plurality of light emitting units arranged in an arc shape in the option setting unit 25 form a third arc-shaped light emitting group. The light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

Further, the game machine 10 includes a left game area in which the game ball can flow down on the left side of the display device 41 and a right game area in which the game ball can flow down on the right side of the display device 41. Form. The game machine 10 includes a normal variable winning device 37 that can be expected to have a larger winning opportunity when the game ball flows down the left game area, and a special variable winning device 37 that can expect a larger winning opportunity when the game ball flows down the right game area. Has 38. Therefore, the game machine 10 may require the player to strike a left-handed ball for hitting the game ball into the left-handed game area and a right-handed player for hitting the game ball into the right game area according to the game state. The first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group are arranged in an arc shape when viewed from the front side, thereby enabling separate guidance according to the light emitting mode. The separate guidance according to the light emission mode will be described later.

Further, the game machine 10 can perform a separate operation by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation unit 24. In the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group, the light emitting parts are arranged in an arc shape corresponding to the rotation direction of the operation unit 24, so that the player can perform the separation guidance. The feeling effect is improved. The arcuate arrangement of the light emitting part shall include an annular arrangement or a spiral arrangement of the light emitting part.

The option setting unit 25 is an example of an operation reception unit that accepts player operations, and the operation reception unit having a third arc-shaped light emitting group is not limited to the option setting unit 25, but is an operation unit 24 and the like. May be good.

Next, the light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of a light emitting unit in the option setting unit of the third embodiment.
The option setting unit 25 includes push button LEDs 250 to 258, touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8, and push button SW. The push button LEDs 250 to 258 are full-color LEDs, respectively. The touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 can detect the player's touch operation. The push button SW can detect the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25.

Here, the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signals of the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8 and the detection signals of the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor TSW1 or the touch sensor TSW6 detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 becomes the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Equivalent to. Further, the state in which the touch sensor TSW4 detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, in the third embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button).

The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface that becomes the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circles about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface, and a push button LED is arranged on each small circle. In the push button 25, the push button LED 250 is arranged in a small circle located in the center of the upper surface, and the push button LEDs 251 to 258 are placed in eight small circles located on the circumference surrounding the small circle located in the center. To place. That is, the push button LEDs 251 to 258 form a third arc-shaped light emitting group arranged in an arc on the inner edge side of the push button 25. The third arc-shaped light emitting group is a form of the annular light emitting group in which the push button LEDs 251 to 258 are arranged in a ring shape.

Since the small circle portion on which the push button LED 258 is arranged does not arrange the touch sensor, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8. The small circle on which the push button LED 258 is arranged is located on the front left side when viewed from the player side when the push button 25 is in the center of the game machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side. It is easy to treat the small circle part 258 as a home position.

Further, since the small circle portion on which the push button LED 258 is arranged does not arrange the touch sensor, it has a star-shaped polygonal design in order to easily distinguish it from the small circle portion on which the touch sensor is arranged.

Next, the light emitting modes of the first arc-shaped light emitting group to the third arc-shaped light emitting group will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 124. First, the emission color in each light emitting unit will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of the emission color in the light emitting unit of the third embodiment.

Each light emitting unit (light emitting units L00 to L0B, L10 to L17, push button LEDs 251 to 258) can be switched and displayed in seven color patterns CP1 to CP7. For example, the color patterns CP1 to CP7 are assigned emission colors "red", "orange", "yellow", "green", "blue", "indigo", and "purple", respectively. Each light emitting unit can perform a so-called rainbow color display effect by sequentially switching the color patterns CP1 to CP7. The rainbow-colored display effect is a light-emitting mode in which the emission colors "red", "orange", "yellow", "green", "blue", "indigo", and "purple" are sequentially switched, and a big hit or a big hit notice is notified. It is used in scenes that produce a relatively large sense of expectation. That is, the game machine 10 can give a big hit notification or a big hit notice notification by the rainbow color display effect.

In addition, although 7 colors are sequentially switched as an example of the rainbow color display effect, the number of colors of 6 colors or less, or the number of colors of 8 colors or more may be sequentially switched. In addition, as an example of the rainbow color display effect, the seven colors of emission colors "red", "orange", "yellow", "green", "blue", "indigo", and "purple" are sequentially switched. A combination other than the illustrated colors may be used, such as using "light blue" instead of "".

Next, the rainbow-colored display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.
The game machine 10 has light emitting colors "red", "orange", "yellow", "green", "blue", "indigo", and "purple" for each light emitting unit L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group). By sequentially switching the seven colors and changing the emission color according to the positions of the light emitting units L00 to L0B, it is possible to produce a movement of the rainbow color display. The game machine 10 switches the display colors of the light emitting units L00 to L0B so that the rainbow color display moves from the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side to the light emitting unit arranged on the lower side. With such a display, the game machine 10 can produce a relatively extremely high expectation for the player.

Next, the display color switching timing of the rainbow-colored display effect shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of the display color switching timing of the rainbow color display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

The light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) perform a rainbow-colored display effect by switching and displaying the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals. For example, the light emitting units L05 and L06 display the color pattern CP1 at the timing t0, switch to the color pattern CP2 at the timing t1, switch to the color pattern CP3 at the timing t2, and switch to the color pattern CP4 at the timing t3. Then, the color pattern CP5 is switched and displayed at the timing t4, the color pattern CP6 is switched and displayed at the timing t5, and the color pattern CP7 is switched and displayed at the timing t6. After that, the light emitting units L05 and L06 return to the timing t0 and switch and display the color pattern CP1. In this way, the light emitting units L00 to L0B switch and display the color patterns CP1 to CP7 so as to circulate at predetermined time intervals.

Further, at timing t0, the light emitting units L05 and L06 display the color pattern CP1, the light emitting units L04 and L07 display the color pattern CP7, the light emitting units L03 and L08 display the color pattern CP6, and the light emitting units L02 and L09. Displays the color pattern CP5, the light emitting units L01 and L0A display the color pattern CP4, and the light emitting units L00 and L0B display the color pattern CP3. In this way, the rainbow-colored display of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) moves from the light emitting units L05 and L06 arranged on the upper side to the light emitting units L00 and L0B arranged on the lower side. You can switch the display color as you like.

As an example, a rainbow-colored display that moves from the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side toward the light emitting part arranged on the lower side is given, but from the light emitting part arranged on the lower side to the light emitting part arranged on the upper side. It may be a rainbow-colored display that moves toward, a rainbow-colored display that does not move, or the like.

Next, the state notification during the rainbow-colored display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 has a rainbow color from one side of the arc-arranged light emitting units L00 to L0B toward the other side depending on the emission color of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the switching timing of the emission color. The display color can be switched so that the display moves.

For example, as shown in (1), the game machine 10 has a light emitting unit located on one side of the arc-shaped light emitting units L00 to L0B, a light emitting unit L01, and then a light emitting unit L02. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves clockwise to L0B. Such a rainbow-colored display is referred to as a clockwise rainbow-colored display for convenience.

Further, as shown in (2), the game machine 10 has a light emitting unit located on one side of the arc-arranged light emitting units L00 to L0B, a light emitting unit L0A, and then a light emitting unit L09. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves counterclockwise up to L00. Such a rainbow color display is referred to as a counterclockwise rainbow color display for convenience.

Such a game machine 10 can perform a state notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display while performing a big hit notification by a rainbow color display effect or a big hit notice notification. For example, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the clockwise rainbow-colored display with the right-handed guidance. Further, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-handed guidance by associating the counterclockwise rainbow-colored display with the left-handed guidance.

Next, the display color switching timing of the clockwise rainbow color display and the display color switching timing of the counterclockwise rainbow color display shown in FIG. 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of the display color switching timing of the clockwise rainbow color display and the display color switching timing of the counterclockwise rainbow color display in the first arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 realizes a clockwise rainbow color display by switching and displaying the color patterns CP1 to CP7 as shown in (1) by the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) at predetermined time intervals. ..

As described with reference to FIG. 120, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) are switched and displayed so as to circulate the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals. As a result, each of the light emitting units L00 to L0B performs a big hit notification by a rainbow-colored display effect or a big hit notice notification.

Further, at the timing t0, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP1, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP7. Further, at the timing t1, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP2, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP1. In this way, the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern displayed by the light emitting unit L00 at the timing immediately before. Similarly, the game machine 10 realizes a clockwise rainbow color display in which the rainbow color display effect in the light emitting units L00 to L0B appears to move clockwise.

Further, in the game machine 10, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) switch and display the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals as shown in (2), thereby displaying a counterclockwise rainbow color. To realize.

As described with reference to FIG. 120, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) are switched and displayed so as to circulate the color patterns CP1 to CP7 at predetermined time intervals. As a result, each of the light emitting units L00 to L0B performs a big hit notification by a rainbow-colored display effect or a big hit notice notification.

Further, at the timing t0, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP1, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP2. Further, at the timing t1, the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP2, and the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 displays the color pattern CP3. In this way, the light emitting unit L01 adjacent to the right side of the light emitting unit L00 first displays the color pattern that the light emitting unit L00 will display at the timing one after. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 realizes a counterclockwise rainbow color display in which the rainbow color display effect in the light emitting units L00 to L0B appears to move counterclockwise.

Up to this point, the clockwise rainbow color display and the counterclockwise rainbow color display by the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) have been described. Next, the clockwise rainbow color display and the counterclockwise rainbow color display by the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the second arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 has a rainbow color from one side of the arc-arranged light emitting units L10 to L17 toward the other side depending on the emission color of the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) and the switching timing of the emission color. The display color can be switched so that the display moves.

For example, as shown in (1), the game machine 10 has a light emitting unit located on one side of the arc-arranged light emitting units L10 to L17, a light emitting unit L11, and then a light emitting unit L12. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves clockwise to L17 (clockwise rainbow color display).

Further, as shown in (2), the game machine 10 has a light emitting unit located on one side of the arc-shaped light emitting units L10 to L17, a light emitting unit L16, and then a light emitting unit L15. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves counterclockwise up to L10 (counterclockwise rainbow color display).

Such a game machine 10 can perform a state notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display while performing a big hit notification by a rainbow color display effect or a big hit notice notification. For example, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the clockwise rainbow-colored display with the right-handed guidance. Further, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-handed guidance by associating the counterclockwise rainbow-colored display with the left-handed guidance.

Further, the game machine 10 can perform a rainbow-colored display effect by using the push button 25. Next, a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display by the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the third arc-shaped light emitting group of the third embodiment.

As shown in (1), the game machine 10 has a rainbow color in the push button LEDs 251 to 258 arranged in a ring shape depending on the emission color of the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped emission group) and the switching timing of the emission color. You can switch the display color so that the display moves clockwise (clockwise rainbow color display).

Further, as shown in (2), the game machine 10 has the push button LEDs 251 to 258 arranged in a ring shape according to the emission color of the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped emission group) and the switching timing of the emission color. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves counterclockwise (counterclockwise rainbow color display).

Such a game machine 10 can perform a state notification by a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display while performing a big hit notification by a rainbow color display effect or a big hit notice notification. For example, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the clockwise rainbow-colored display with the right-handed guidance. Further, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-handed guidance by associating the counterclockwise rainbow-colored display with the left-handed guidance.

In addition, two or more arc-shaped light emitting groups of the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group are in a state of being displayed in a clockwise rainbow color or a counterclockwise rainbow color display in synchronization. Notification can be performed. For example, the display colors of the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group can be switched so that the rainbow-colored display moves from the light emitting units L00 and L10 located on one side at the same timing. As a result, the game machine 10 can obtain a greater notification effect than the notification by one arc-shaped light emitting group. In this case, the game machine 10 emits light from the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group in order to align the moving cycles of the rainbow-colored display of the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group. The timing of switching the emission color in the unit may be different.

Even if the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group independently perform status notification by clockwise rainbow color display or counterclockwise rainbow color display. Good. For example, the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group may be used to notify the value of the jackpot by displaying a clockwise rainbow color or a counterclockwise rainbow color display. .. For example, the first arc-shaped light emitting group notifies the number of rounds, the second arc-shaped light emitting group notifies the presence or absence of probability fluctuation, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group notifies the presence or absence of normal electric support. As described above, the game machine 10 aims to improve the notification effect by notifying the gaming state by combining the display modes of the first arc-shaped light emitting group, the second arc-shaped light emitting group, and the third arc-shaped light emitting group. At the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is a special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special figure). Further, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as the third embodiment, but the same applies to the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each game machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D31, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each of the above processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of voice from speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also responds to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the number of balls rented)). This is a process that corrects the mode of the effect.

After executing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal or the like to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there are cases where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends the effect command to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term "store" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If there is, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of command receptions, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit sets the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be in the normal range (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the separated ACT is the correct combination with respect to the value of the separated MODE. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT value is the correct combination is executed including the check for missing teeth whether or not the combination of ACT is normal for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command We are comparing and confirming whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, the variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the jackpot production, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process. The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect.

Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. Etc. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Decoration control processing]
Next, the decoration control process will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration control processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D28 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the test mode decoration process. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether or not a decoration device such as an LED provided in the game machine 10 is normally lit with a preset decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the normal mode.

[Step D72] The control unit executes an error-time decoration process. The control unit executes the error-related decoration process when the effect control device 300 receives the error-related command from the game control device 100, and does not execute the error-time decoration process when the effect-related command is not received. The error-time decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for notifying a player or an employee of a game hall that an error has occurred.

[Step D73] The control unit executes the decoration setting process. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the game state. The decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

[Step D74] The control unit executes the event decoration setting process. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a predetermined event when a predetermined event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when the push button 25 is operated. The event decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

[Step D75] The control unit executes the decoration pattern control data setting process. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each effect device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. To do. The control unit ends the decoration control process after executing the decoration pattern control data setting process.

[Decoration setting process]
Next, the decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration setting processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

[Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when the game state is "power on", proceeds to step D84 when the game state is "power failure recovery", and proceeds to step D86 when the game state is "waiting for customers". When the game state is "changing", the process proceeds to step D88, when the game state is "symbol stopped", the process proceeds to step D89, when the game state is "fanfare", the process proceeds to step D90, and the game state is "fanfare". If "in the round", the process proceeds to step D91, and if the game state is "ending", the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting. The loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the power-on decoration pattern from the power-on to the game-playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration corresponding to the power-on until the game becomes playable. After setting the power-on decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets the power failure recovery decoration pattern from the recovery from the power failure to the playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration corresponding to the recovery from the power failure until the game becomes playable. After setting the power failure recovery decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The control unit executes the customer waiting demo decoration setting process while waiting for customers (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demo in the customer waiting demo decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 displays the decoration corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration while waiting for the customer. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the customer waiting demo decoration setting process.

[Step D88] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the game state is "changing", that is, the changing display game is being executed. In the changing decoration setting process, the control unit uses a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the changing display game being executed (for example, a rainbow including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display when a jackpot notice is included). Color display) is set. As a result, the game machine 10 performs decorative display corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed while the variable display game is being executed. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the changing decoration setting process.

[Step D89] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped when the game state is "stopped symbol", that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is stopped in the symbol stop decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the identification symbol is stopped while the identification symbol is stopped. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped.

[Step D90] The control unit executes the fanfare middle decoration setting process when the game state is "fanfare in progress", that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the fanfare medium decoration setting process. .. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit during the fanfare. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during fanfare. The game machine 10 displays the decoration with the decoration pattern set in the fanfare middle decoration setting process until the jackpot state is started. Further, the details of the decoration setting process in the fanfare will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

[Step D91] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during the round when the game state is "during the round", that is, when each round in the jackpot state is executed. In the decoration setting process during the round, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the round is in progress. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the round is in progress during the round. The control unit finishes the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the round.

[Step D92] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during ending when the game state is "ending", that is, the ending process indicating that the jackpot state has ended is executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the ending is in progress. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the ending is in progress during the ending. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the ending.

[Fanfare medium decoration setting process]
Next, the decoration setting process in the fanfare will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the decoration setting process during fanfare in the effect control device of the third embodiment. The decoration setting process during fanfare is a process executed by the control unit in step D90 of the decoration setting process. The decorative pattern in the fanfare is a rainbow-colored display in the first half and a clockwise rainbow-colored display or a counterclockwise rainbow-colored display in the second half.

[Step D101] The control unit branches processing according to a timer value indicating the passage of time during fanfare. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when the timer value indicates "first half of fanfare", and proceeds to step D103 when the timer value indicates "second half of fanfare".

[Step D102] The control unit executes the fanfare first half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "fanfare first half". In the fanfare first half decoration setting process, the control unit sets a rainbow color display (for example, the rainbow color display effect shown in FIG. 118) as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display in the first half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. After executing the first half decoration setting process of the fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process during the fanfare.

[Step D103] The control unit determines whether or not the hitting direction guidance after the jackpot state is started is left, that is, left or right. The control unit proceeds to step D104 when the striking direction guidance after the jackpot state is started is left, and proceeds to step D105 when the striking direction guidance after the jackpot state is started is not left. The hitting direction guidance is a guidance for separating left-handed and right-handed hits according to the game state, and the game machine 10 determines whether or not the hitting direction guide is left according to the game state after the jackpot state starts. Can be judged.

[Step D104] The control unit executes the left-handed direction guidance decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "the latter half of the fanfare" and "left-handed direction guidance". In the left-handed direction guidance decoration setting process, the control unit counterclockwise as a decorative pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction is left after the big hit state is started. The rainbow color display (for example, the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect shown in FIG. 121 (2)) is set. As a result, the game machine 10 makes a decorative display in the latter half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction is left after the big hit state is started. After executing the left-handed direction guidance decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D105] The control unit executes the right-handed direction guidance decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "the latter half of the fanfare" and "the right-handed direction guidance". In the right-handed direction guidance decoration setting process, the control unit uses a clockwise rainbow as a decorative pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction is right after the big hit state is started. A color display (for example, a clockwise rainbow color display effect shown in FIG. 121 (1)) is set. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display in the latter half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit and that the hitting direction is right after the big hit state is started. After executing the right-handed direction guidance decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the game effect when the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit due to the rainbow color display effect. Further, the game machine 10 can perform a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect as a form of the rainbow color display effect while continuing the rainbow color display effect. As a result, the game machine 10 continues the game production accompanying the result of the variable display game becoming a big hit, and provides the player with guidance on the striking direction (warning the player) after the big hit state is started. Can be done for. That is, the game machine 10 can achieve both the alerting to the player and the game production.

Although the game effect during the fanfare is shown as an example of the rainbow color display effect, it may be during the round, the ending, the fluctuation, or the like. For example, the game machine 10 can perform a big hit effect by the rainbow color display effect, and can notify the hitting direction of the round by the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. Further, the game machine 10 can perform the effect during the interval by the rainbow color display effect, and can notify the striking direction of the next round by the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. Guidance of the striking direction during such a round or during an interval can suitably guide the striking direction to the player while achieving a balance with the game effect when the striking direction is different for each round.

In addition, the game machine 10 can notify the changing jackpot notice by the rainbow-colored display effect, and can notify the hitting direction after the jackpot by the clockwise rainbow-colored display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow-colored display effect. In addition, the game machine 10 notifies the value of the jackpot (presence or absence of probability fluctuation, presence or absence of general electric support, number of rounds, etc.) regardless of the striking direction by the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. be able to.

In addition, as an application example of the rainbow color display effect, other game states such as during a round, ending, and fluctuation are mentioned, but even in these game states, the decoration pattern is set in the first half and the second half as in the fanfare middle decoration setting process. It can be divided into. In that case, the game machine 10 can perform a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. That is, the game machine 10 can perform a clockwise rainbow color display effect or a counterclockwise rainbow color display effect in the first half portion, and perform a rainbow color display effect in the second half portion.

Further, in the fanfare middle decoration setting process, the first half portion and the second half portion are divided by the timer value, but may be divided by an event trigger such as input detection from a predetermined input portion.
[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 1 of the third embodiment in which the start or end of the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect is set by the event trigger will be described.

[Event decoration setting process]
The event decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the event decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first modification of the third embodiment. The event decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the decoration control process.

[Step D111] The control unit branches the process according to the event state. The control unit proceeds to step D112 when the event state is "decision button decoration flag is on", proceeds to step D114 when the event state is "selection button decoration flag is on", and the event state is "start port switch is on". If it is "on", the process proceeds to step D116, and if the event state is "the large winning opening switch is on", the process proceeds to step D117.

[Step D112] The control unit clears the enter button decoration flag. The decision button decoration flag is a flag that is set when the decision button switch 25b is detected to be turned on while the decision button switch 25b is enabled.

[Step D113] The control unit executes the decision button decoration setting process. The decision button decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect executed by the operation of the decision button switch 25b. For example, the game machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect by operating the decision button switch 25b during the predetermined effect. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the decision button decoration setting process.

[Step D114] The control unit clears the selection button decoration flag. The selection button decoration flag is a flag that is set when the selection button switch 25a is detected to be turned on while the selection button switch 25a is enabled.

[Step D115] The control unit executes the selection button decoration setting process. The selection button decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect executed by the operation of the selection button switch 25a. For example, the game machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect by operating the selection button switch 25a during the predetermined effect. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the selection button decoration setting process.

[Step D116] The control unit executes the start winning decoration setting process. The decoration setting process for the start winning prize corresponds to the effect executed by winning the game ball in the starting winning opening when the starting opening switch is set to on, that is, when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening. This is the process of setting the decoration pattern to be used. For example, the game machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect depending on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening during the predetermined effect. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the start winning decoration setting process.

The target starting winning opening may be either one or both of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch. For example, the game machine 10 can detect the winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 by setting the target starting winning opening as the starting opening 2 switch. In this case, if the game machine 10 is in a position where it is easy to win a prize when the normal variable winning device 37 is left-handed and the left-handed guidance is in progress, turning on the start port switch may be the end trigger of the left-handed guidance. it can. Further, in the game machine 10, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in a position where it is easy to win a left-handed hit and a right-handed hit should be made, turning on the start port switch can be a trigger for starting the right-handed hit guide. ..

[Step D117] The control unit executes the decoration setting process for the special variable winning device. In the decoration setting process for the special variable winning device, when the large winning opening switch 38a is set to ON, that is, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38), the game ball is placed in the large winning opening. This is a process of setting a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect executed by winning a prize. For example, the game machine 10 starts or ends the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect depending on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening during the predetermined effect. The control unit ends the event decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process for the special variable winning device.

If the special variable winning device 38 is in a position where it is easy to win a prize when the special variable winning device 38 is left-handed and the left-handed guidance is being performed, the on of the large winning opening switch 38a is used as the end trigger of the left-handed guidance. Can be done. Further, if the special variable winning device 38 is in a position where it is easy to win a prize when the special variable winning device 38 is right-handed and the right-handed guidance is being performed, the on of the large winning opening switch 38a is the trigger for the end of the right-handed guidance. Can be done.

As described above, the game machine 10 can perform the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect only for a necessary period.
[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the light emitting mode from the first arc-shaped light emitting group to the third arc-shaped light emitting group will be described with reference to FIG. 132. First, the emission color in each light emitting unit will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of the emission color in the light emitting portion of the second modification of the third embodiment.

Each light emitting unit (light emitting units L00 to L0B, L10 to L17, push button LEDs 251 to 258) can be switched and displayed in eight color patterns CP1 to CP8. Of these, the color patterns CP1 to CP7 have a predetermined emission color assignment, and the color pattern CP8 has no emission color assignment and corresponds to extinguishing. By sequentially switching the color patterns CP1 to CP8, each light emitting unit can perform a so-called rainbow-colored display effect, and can clearly indicate the division of one cycle by turning off the lights.

As described above, since the game machine 10 includes the extinguishing timing during the cycle of the rainbow color display effect, the rainbow color display is displayed to the player when performing the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. You can get a clearer sense of the direction in which the production turns.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modified example of applying the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect to the operation guidance of the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display in-screen in the display device of the modification 3 of the third embodiment.

The variable display in-screen 600 is the display content of the display device 41. The variable display middle screen 600 includes a special figure game game display 601, a hold display 602, a hold digestion display 603, a special figure 1 hold number display 604, a special figure 2 hold number display 605, and participation in the production. Includes guidance display 606. The special figure game game display 601 is a display including at least a part of information on the display contents regarding the game state of the special figure game. For example, the special figure game game display 601 indicates that the decorative symbol is changing.

The hold display 602 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold memory depending on the display mode. For example, the hold display 602 displays a white circle icon display for the hold memories 1 to 6 and 8, and a black circle icon display for the hold memory No. 7, so that the game result of the hold memory No. 7 is displayed. Notifies that the degree of expectation for is relatively high. Depending on the display mode, the hold digestion display 603 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

The special figure 1 hold number display 604 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 605 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The number of held storages displayed by the holding display 602 corresponds to the sum of the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 1 holding number display 604 and the number of holding storages displayed by the special drawing 2 holding number display 605. For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 604 displays "4" and the special figure 2 hold number display 605 displays "4", the hold display 602 displays the number of hold memories by displaying eight round icons. Indicates that it is "8".

The production participation guidance display 606 is a display for guiding the player to participate in the production with the push button 25. For example, the game machine 10 displays an image of a clock on the display device 41 with a message "Rewind time!". Further, the game machine 10 displays an image of the push button 25 on the display device 41 to guide the player that the operation target is the push button 25.

At this time, the game machine 10 can guide the player to participate in the effect by performing the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect on the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group). The game machine 10 can detect the touch operation of the player by the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8.

The variable display screen 600 displayed the message "Rewind the time!", But for example, the message "Fast forward the time!" Is displayed on the push button LEDs 251 to 258 (third arc-shaped light emitting group). It is also possible to produce a clockwise rainbow color display.

Since the push button 25 is arranged by superimposing the push button LEDs 251 to 258 and the touch sensors TSW1 to TSW8, the game machine 10 is provided with the operation guidance by the clockwise rainbow color display effect or the counterclockwise rainbow color display effect. Operation guidance can be provided directly and easily.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform a highly promising game effect by the rainbow color display effect, and while continuing the rainbow color display effect, the clockwise rainbow color display is a form of the rainbow color display effect. Operation guidance can be performed by directing or counterclockwise rainbow-colored display directing. That is, the game machine 10 can achieve both the alerting to the player (operation guidance) and the game production.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, a state notification during a rainbow-colored display effect in a game machine in which a plurality of light emitting units are linearly arranged will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the linear light emitting group of the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 displays a rainbow color from one side of the linearly arranged light emitting units L20 to L25 toward the other side depending on the emission color of the light emitting units L20 to L25 (linear light emitting group) and the switching timing of the emission color. The display color can be switched so that is moved.

For example, as shown in (1), the game machine 10 emits light emitted from the light emitting unit L20 located on one side of the linearly arranged light emitting units L20 to L25 to the light emitting unit L21 and then the light emitting unit L22. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves to the right to the unit L25. Such a rainbow color display is referred to as a rightward rainbow color display for convenience.

Further, as shown in (2), the game machine 10 emits light emitted from the light emitting unit L25 located on one side of the linearly arranged light emitting units L20 to L25 to the light emitting unit L24 and then the light emitting unit L23. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves to the left to the unit L20. Such a rainbow color display is referred to as a left rainbow color display for convenience.

Such a game machine 10 can perform a state notification by a rainbow color display in the right direction or a rainbow color display in the left direction while performing a big hit notification by a rainbow color display effect or a notice notification of a big hit. For example, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the right-direction rainbow-colored display with the right-handed guidance. Further, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-handed guidance by associating the left-direction rainbow-colored display with the left-handed guidance.

The arcuate arrangement and the linear arrangement of the plurality of light emitting parts described in the third embodiment including the modified example are one form of the directional light emitting part arrangement. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a row (arranged in a row) as a directional light emitting unit arrangement. Further, the row arrangement is not limited to one row, and two or more rows may be arranged (for example, a strip arrangement). Further, the row arrangement is not limited to a straight line, and may be any curved line or a polygonal line (arc arrangement, annular arrangement, curved arrangement, polygonal arrangement).

[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
Next, a state notification during a rainbow-colored display effect in a game machine in which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a lump will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a state notification during the rainbow color display effect in the massive light emitting group of the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

The game machine 10 causes the rainbow-colored display to move in a preset order for the light emitting units L30 to L3A arranged in a massive manner according to the light emitting color of the light emitting units L30 to L3A (lumpy light emitting group) and the switching timing of the light emitting color. You can switch the display color to.

For example, in the game machine 10, as shown in (1), with respect to the light emitting units L30 to L3A arranged in a massive manner, the light emitting unit L30 to the light emitting unit L30 adjacent to the light emitting unit L30, and the light emitting unit L32 adjacent to the light emitting unit L31, A light emitting unit L33 adjacent to the light emitting unit L32, a light emitting unit L34 adjacent to the light emitting unit L33, a light emitting unit L35 adjacent to the light emitting unit L34, a light emitting unit L36 adjacent to the light emitting unit L35, and a light emitting unit L37 adjacent to the light emitting unit L36. The display color can be switched so that the rainbow color display moves in the order of the light emitting unit L38 adjacent to the light emitting unit L37, the light emitting unit L39 adjacent to the light emitting unit L38, and the light emitting unit L3A adjacent to the light emitting unit L39. For convenience, such a rainbow-colored display is referred to as a normal-order rainbow-colored display.

Further, as shown in (2), the game machine 10 may switch the display colors of the light emitting units L30 to L3A arranged in a massive manner so that the rainbow color display moves in the reverse order of the normal order rainbow color display. it can. For convenience, such a rainbow-colored display is referred to as a reverse-order rainbow-colored display.

Such a game machine 10 can perform a state notification by a normal order rainbow color display or a reverse order rainbow color display while performing a big hit notification by a rainbow color display effect or a big hit notice notification. For example, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the right-handed guidance by associating the forward-order rainbow-colored display with the right-handed guidance. Further, the game machine 10 can simultaneously perform the jackpot notification and the left-handed guidance by associating the reverse-order rainbow-colored display with the left-handed guidance.

Further, the game machine 10 can easily distinguish between the normal order rainbow color display and the reverse order rainbow color display by setting the order in which the adjacent light emitting units are lined up for the light emitting units L30 to L3A as the display color switching order. In the game machine 10, the order in which adjacent light emitting units are lined up for the light emitting units L30 to L3A is set as the display color switching order. For example, a random order irrelevant to the arrangement position is set as the display color switching order. May be good. Further, the game machine 10 may fix the first light emitting unit and the last light emitting unit and select and set one intermediate switching path from two or more intermediate switching paths. For example, the first light emitting unit L30 and the last light emitting unit L3A are fixed, and the first intermediate switching path (L31, L32, L33, L34, L35, L36, L37, L38, L39) and the second One of the intermediate switching paths (L36, L31, L32, L33, L34, L35, L38, L37, L39) may be selected and set.

In this way, when there are a plurality of options for the switching route, the game machine 10 can notify the gaming state according to the switching route in addition to the forward-order rainbow-colored display and the reverse-order rainbow-colored display.
Further, the game machine 10 sets the first of the display color switching order, which is the normal order for the light emitting units L30 to L3A, to the light emitting unit L30 located at the peripheral portion of the massive light emitting group, and the last is set to the peripheral portion of the massive light emitting group. By setting the light emitting unit L3A located at, it is possible to easily distinguish between the normal order rainbow color display and the reverse order rainbow color display. In the game machine 10, the first of the display color switching order, which is the normal order for the light emitting units L30 to L3A, is set to the light emitting unit L30 located at the peripheral portion of the massive light emitting group, and the last is set to the peripheral portion of the same massive light emitting group. Although it is set to the light emitting unit L3A located in, the light emitting unit at an arbitrary position of the massive light emitting group may be the first light emitting unit or the last light emitting unit.

The game machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the first to fifth modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a plurality of light emitting units arranged on the front side (first arc-shaped light emitting group: light emitting units L00 to L0B, second arc-shaped light emitting group: L10 to L17, third arc-shaped light emitting group: It is equipped with push button LEDs 251 to 258). The game machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit emits light from a plurality of light emitting units in a light emitting mode (rainbow color display effect) in which a plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially switched, and notifies the first state (big hit, big hit notice, etc.) (first state notification). The control unit switches the emission color of the plurality of light emitting units by providing a time difference in a predetermined order in relation to the occurrence of the first game state (big hit, normal electric support) for executing the first game (right-handed). Time difference in reverse order of predetermined order in relation to the occurrence of the first display mode (for example, clockwise rainbow color display effect) or the second game state (normal game state) in which the second game (left-handed) is executed. In the second display mode (for example, counterclockwise rainbow color display effect) for switching the emission color, the second state notification for notifying the second state (launch of the game ball) and (operation guidance notification) are performed. Do it.

(2) The plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a row on the front side, and in the first display mode, the display colors are switched so that the rainbow color display moves from one side to the other side, and in the second display mode. Switch the display color so that the rainbow color display moves from the other side to one side.

(3) The plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row include a first row of light emitting groups arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board.
(4) The plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row include a second row of light emitting groups arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board.

(5) The plurality of light emitting units arranged in a row include a third row of light emitting groups arranged in a row in the operation reception unit (push button 25, operation unit 24) that receives the player's operation.
(6) In (5), the operation receiving unit superimposes the touch sensor that receives the player's touch operation and the light emitting unit.

(7) The row arrangement is a linear arrangement, an arc arrangement, an annular arrangement, a curved arrangement, or a polygonal line arrangement.
(8) The row arrangement is a linear arrangement in which a plurality of light emitting parts are arranged in a row, or a strip arrangement in which a plurality of light emitting parts are arranged in two or more rows.

(9) The plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a lump on the front side, and the display colors are switched so that the rainbow-colored display moves in the order preset in the first display mode, and the display colors are switched in the preset order in the second display mode. The display color is switched in the reverse order of.

(10) The control unit sequentially switches between seven color patterns (“red”, “orange”, “yellow”, “green”, “blue”, “indigo”, and “purple”).
(11) The control unit includes a turn-off timing during the cycle of the light emission mode in which the plurality of light emission colors are sequentially switched.

(12) The control unit guides the hitting direction of the game ball according to the game state by the first display mode or the second display mode.
(13) The control unit guides the hitting direction of the game ball according to the game state by the first display mode or the second display mode.

(14) The control unit guides the game value to be given to the player by the first display mode or the second display mode.
(15) The control unit guides the game state notification or the game value to be given to the player by the combination of the first display mode or the second display mode displayed by the two or more row-shaped light emitting groups or the massive light emitting groups. To do.

(16) The control unit sets the start of the first display mode or the second display mode as a timer trigger after a predetermined game state transition.
(17) The control unit sets the end of the first display mode or the second display mode as an event trigger after the transition to a predetermined gaming state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 5) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a plurality of light emitting units arranged on the front side (first arc-shaped light emitting group: light emitting units L00 to L0B, second arc-shaped light emitting group: L10 to L17, third arc-shaped light emitting group: It is equipped with push button LEDs 251 to 258). The game machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit emits light from a plurality of light emitting units in a light emitting mode (rainbow color display effect) in which a plurality of light emitting colors are sequentially switched, and notifies the first state (big hit, big hit notice, etc.) (first state notification). The control unit switches the emission color of the plurality of light emitting units by providing a time difference in a predetermined order in relation to the occurrence of the first game state (big hit, normal electric support) for executing the first game (right-handed). Time difference in reverse order of predetermined order in relation to the occurrence of the first display mode (for example, clockwise rainbow color display effect) or the second game state (normal game state) in which the second game (left-handed) is executed. In the second display mode (for example, counterclockwise rainbow color display effect) for switching the emission color, the second state notification for notifying the second state (launch of the game ball) and (operation guidance notification) are performed. Do it.

(2) In (1), the game machine 10 has a game board detachably attached to the main body frame and a plurality of light emitting units arranged on the front side, and is rotatable with respect to the main body frame. A variable display game is executed on a variable display device (for example, display device 41, batch display device 50) provided on the game board, which is provided with a transparent member holding frame to be pivotally attached, and the execution result of the variable display game is special. When the result is obtained, a special game state can be generated. The control unit is in a state in which the execution result of the variable display game can be a special result (a state in which three symbols are aligned, for example, when all three symbols are swaying, full rotation, re-lottery, fanfare, etc.). In this case, when the first state notification is executed and the special game state is generated, the second state notification is executed according to the first display mode.

(3) In (2), a game area is formed on the game board, and the game area is a first game area in which the launch position (launch force) of the game ball is set in the first game state, and a second game. It is composed of a second game area in which the launch position (launch force) of the game ball is set in the state, and the first game state includes a special game state.

(4) In (1), it has a game board that is detachably attached to the main body frame and a plurality of light emitting parts arranged on the front side, and is rotatably attached to the main body frame. It includes a member holding frame and a game control unit that executes a variable display game on a variable display device provided on a game board and generates a special game state when the execution result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The control unit executes the first state notification when the execution result of the variable display game becomes a special result, and when the special game state is generated, the control unit notifies the second state by the second display mode. Execute.

(5) In (4), a game area is formed on the game board, and the game area is composed of a first game area in which the launch position of the game ball is set in the first game state and the second game state. The first gaming state includes a special gaming state.

(6) In (3) or (5), the game board attached to the main body frame is either the game board of (2) or (3) or the game board of (4) or (5). Also, the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting units in the first state notification is common.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment alerts the player by the alert display arranged on the game board 30. Further, in the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the game effect is performed by the light emitting unit. First, the warning display and the arrangement of the light emitting unit on the front side of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a warning display and an arrangement of a light emitting unit in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

In the game machine 10, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) are formed on the front frame 12 in the same manner as described in the third embodiment. To be equipped. In addition, the game machine 10 includes a warning display 610. The attention alert display 610 is located in front of the game machine 10, more specifically, in the game area of the game board 30, and is located at the uppermost part in the game area. The attention-calling display 610 is a display that calls attention to the player, and includes visual information such as characters and pictograms.

The alert display 610 is formed as part of the design of the cell of the game board 30. The caution display 610 may be located on the front surface of the game machine 10, and does not necessarily have to be located on the game board. Further, the alert display 610 may be provided independently of the cell, or may be provided, for example, in the side case 33 or the like. The caution display 610 functions as a model-dependent warning display corresponding to the game board 30 if provided on the game board 30, and as a display common to a plurality of models if provided on the front frame 12. Function.

The alert display 610 has a substantially arc-shaped display area along the inner edge of the substantially circular game area. That is, the caution display 610 is also formed in an arc shape in the same manner as the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group).

Next, the display content of the alert display 610 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the warning display of the fourth embodiment.
The display contents shown in (1) are a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark "!" In a triangular frame) that calls attention to the player, and a character string "the same light for a long time from a short distance" indicating the specific caution content. Be careful not to stare at it. " Such display contents are attached to a game machine having a light emitting unit that emits light in a predetermined mode (for example, a predetermined light emission intensity, a light emission duration, a predetermined cycle blinking, etc.) to provide a safe and secure game environment. To contribute.

The display content shown in (2) includes the character string "equipped with a fraud monitoring system" indicating specific caution content. Such display contents are attached to a game machine equipped with a fraud monitoring system (for example, fraud monitoring by a magnetic sensor 61, a panel radio wave sensor 62, etc.), and check fraudulent games by fraudulent players.

The display contents shown in (3) are a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark "!" In a triangular frame) that calls attention to the player, and a character string "striking or pushing the game machine" indicating specific caution contents. , Please do not pull. " Such display contents are attached to the game machine in common to a plurality of models, and contribute to the provision of a safe and secure game environment.

The display contents shown in (4) are a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark "!" In a triangular frame) that calls attention to the player, and a character string "Keep away magnets" that indicates specific caution contents. Including. Such display contents are attached to the game machine in common to a plurality of models, and contribute to the provision of a safe and secure game environment.

The display contents shown in (5) are a pictogram (displaying an exclamation mark "!" In a triangular frame) that calls attention to the player, and a character string "appropriate for long-term games" indicating specific caution contents. Let's set a break time in. " Such display contents are attached to the game machine in common to a plurality of models, and contribute to the provision of a safe and secure game environment.

The display contents shown in (1) to (5) above are examples, and the display contents are not limited to the contents of caution to the player. The display content may be a game guide, a game performance display, or the like, as long as it is a display content that calls attention to the player.

Next, the display effect of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a movement display effect starting from the alert display of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 turns on and off a predetermined light emitting color (for example, "red") for each light emitting unit L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and light emitting unit L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). By switching according to the position of the light emitting unit, it is possible to produce a movement of the lighting display.

The game machine 10 starts from the warning display 610, and the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to move so that the lighting display moves from the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side to the light emitting unit arranged on the lower side. Switching on and off of L17. With such a display (warning start point movement display), the game machine 10 can draw the player's attention to the warning display 610. Since the game machine 10 constantly posts the attention alert display 610, it has a role of guiding the time when the attention alert display 610 should be paid attention to or the time when it is desirable to pay attention to the attention alert display 610 by the attention alert start point movement display.

The caution display 610 is a position sandwiched between the arc formed by the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the arc formed by the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). It is in. As a result, even if one arc-shaped light emitting group may not be able to clearly pay attention to the warning display 610, the game machine 10 may clearly pay attention to the warning display 610 by the two arc-shaped light emitting groups. it can.

Further, the caution display 610 is located at a position where the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) are divided into left and right light emitting units L00 to L05 and light emitting units L06 to L0B, and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). The arc-shaped light emitting group) is divided into left and right light emitting parts L10 to L12 and light emitting parts L13 to L17. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L05 function as the first row light emitting group, the light emitting units L06 to L0B function as the second row light emitting group, and the light emitting units L10 to L12 serve as the third row light emitting group. It functions, and the light emitting units L13 to L17 function as a fourth row light emitting group. As a result, the four row-shaped light emitting groups are arranged so that one end thereof is directed toward the warning display 610, and the game machine 10 can draw the attention of the warning display 610 more clearly by the four row-shaped light emitting groups. it can.

Next, the switching timing of lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 in the attention alerting start point movement display shown in FIG. 138 will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode switching timing of the movement display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 switches between lighting (ON) and extinguishing (OFF) of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) at predetermined time intervals. Attention Calling Start point movement display is performed.

First, the game machine 10 turns off all the lights of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) at the timing t0. As a result, the game machine 10 resets the player's attention. Next, the game machine 10 turns on the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13 at the timing t1, and continues to turn off the rest. As a result, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13. In addition, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the caution display 610 located in the vicinity of the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13.

Next, the game machine 10 switches the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13 from lighting to off, and switches the light emitting units L04, L07, L11, and L14 from off to on at timing t2. As a result, the game machine 10 performs the attention alert start point movement display starting from the attention alert display 610. Further, the game machine 10 can improve the visibility of the alert display 610 after the player's attention by turning off the light emitting units L05, L06, L12, and L13 at the timing t2.

After that, the game machine 10 switches the light emitting units L04, L07, L11, and L14 from lighting to off, and switches the light emitting units L03, L08, L10, and L15 from off to on at timing t3. At timing t4, the game machine 10 switches the light emitting units L03, L08, L10, and L15 from lighting to off, and switches the light emitting units L02, L09, and L16 from off to on. At the timing t5, the game machine 10 switches the light emitting units L02, L09, and L16 from lighting to extinguishing, and switches the light emitting units L01, L0A, and L17 from extinguishing to lighting. The game machine 10 switches the light emitting units L01, L0A, and L17 from lighting to off, and switches the light emitting units L00, L0B from off to on at timing t6. The gaming machine 10 may return to the timing t0, turn off all the lights, and loop the display mode switching of the timings t0 to t6, or may shift to another fluctuation pattern after going through the timings t0 to t6. Good. Further, the movement display effect including the attention alert start point movement display may be a display effect in which the lighting mode moves from one end to the other end of the row formed by the plurality of light emitting units, and can be used for switching between single color lighting and extinguishing. Not limited to this, other display modes can be applied, including switching of display color, switching of blinking cycle, switching of lighting intensity, and switching of timing of rainbow color display as described in the third embodiment.

Since such a game machine 10 always posts the attention alert display 610, the attention level to the attention alert display 610 can be sufficiently improved by the attention alert start point movement display. Further, since the game machine 10 does not newly call attention by a display device or the like, it is possible to limit the decline in the interest of the game. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) achieve both an improvement in attention to the attention alert display 610 and an effect display. To do.

Next, another display effect of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a movement display effect ending at the attention display of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 turns on and off a predetermined light emitting color (for example, "red") for each light emitting unit L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and light emitting unit L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). By switching according to the position of the light emitting unit, it is possible to produce a movement of the lighting display. The game machine 10 has the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to move so that the lighting display moves from the light emitting unit arranged on the lower side to the light emitting unit arranged on the upper side with the caution display 610 as the end point. Switching on and off of L17. With such a display (warning end point movement display), the game machine 10 can draw attention to the warning display 610 to the player. Since the game machine 10 constantly posts the attention alert display 610, it has a role of guiding the time when the attention alert display 610 should be paid attention to or the time when it is desirable to pay attention to the attention alert display 610 by the attention alert end point movement display.

The gaming machine 10 calls attention to the switching timing of the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 shown in FIG. 139 by switching the timings t1 to t6 in the reverse order after the timing t0. A moving display can be realized.

The game machine 10 performs such a warning start point movement display or a warning end point movement display during fanfare.
[Fanfare medium decoration setting process]
Next, the decoration setting process in the fanfare will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a fanfare intermediate decoration setting process in the effect control device of the fourth embodiment. The decoration setting process during fanfare is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300) in step D90 of the decoration setting process. The decoration pattern set by the fanfare middle decoration setting process is as follows: the first half is the warning start point movement display and the second half is the normal fanfare display, and the first half is the normal fanfare display and the second half is the warning end point movement display. There are cases where it is done.

[Step D1010] The control unit determines whether or not the fanfare display includes either the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display. The control unit proceeds to step D1011 when the fanfare display includes the attention alert start point movement display, and proceeds to step D1014 when the fanfare display including the attention alert start point movement display is not displayed.

For example, the control unit can acquire model-dependent information from the game control device 100 and determine the mode of the movement display effect based on the information. That is, when the game machine 10 is a model in which the attention alert start point movement display is desirable from the configuration and the effect mode of the game board 30, the game control device 100 instructs the control unit to display the attention alert start point movement display. Further, when the game machine 10 is a model in which the attention-calling end-point movement display is desirable from the configuration and the effect mode of the game board 30, the game control device 100 instructs the control unit to display the warning-calling end-point movement.

[Step D1011] The control unit branches processing according to a timer value indicating the passage of time during fanfare. The control unit proceeds to step D1012 when the timer value indicates "first half of fanfare", and proceeds to step D1013 when the timer value indicates "second half of fanfare".

[Step D1012] The control unit executes the attention alert start point decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "the first half of the fanfare". The game machine 10 displays the attention alert start point movement by the attention alert start point decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 draws attention to the caution display 610 to the player at the start of the fanfare. After executing the attention alert start point decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D1013] The control unit executes the fanfare second half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "fanfare second half". In the fanfare second half decoration setting process, the control unit sets a rainbow-colored display effect as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display in the latter half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. After executing the fanfare second half decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D1014] The control unit branches processing according to a timer value indicating the passage of time during fanfare. The control unit proceeds to step D1015 when the timer value indicates "first half of fanfare", and proceeds to step D1016 when the timer value indicates "second half of fanfare".

[Step D1015] The control unit executes the fanfare first half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "fanfare first half". In the fanfare first half decoration setting process, the control unit sets a rainbow-colored display effect as a decoration pattern indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display in the first half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. After executing the first half decoration setting process of the fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process during the fanfare.

[Step D1016] The control unit executes the warning end point decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "the latter half of the fanfare". The game machine 10 displays the attention alert end point movement display by the attention alert end point decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 draws attention to the caution display 610 to the player at the end of the fanfare. The control unit ends the decoration setting process during fanfare after executing the attention-calling end point decoration setting process.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the game effect when the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit due to the rainbow color display effect. In addition, the game machine 10 can perform the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display in cooperation with the rainbow color display effect. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to the attention alert display 610 while continuing the game effect associated with the result of the variable display game becoming a big hit. That is, the game machine 10 can achieve both the alerting to the player and the game production.

Although the game effect during the fanfare is shown as an example of the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display, it may be during a round, ending, or during fluctuation. Further, the game machine 10 may display the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display every time a predetermined time elapses, and further, the attention alert start point movement display or the alert alert start point movement display corresponding to the game state when the predetermined time elapses. It may be the one that displays the movement of the end point to call attention.

Further, although the game machine 10 determines the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display depending on the model, it may be determined according to the game state. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display the attention alert start point movement display when performing the fanfare effect, and the attention alert end point movement display when performing the ending effect.

Further, the game machine 10 may determine the mode of the movement display effect (for example, the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display) in relation to the notification of the game state. For example, the game machine 10 may notify the value of the jackpot (whether or not there is a probability fluctuation, whether or not there is a general electric support, the number of rounds, etc.) in association with the alerting start point movement display or the alerting end point movement display. According to this, the game machine 10 can draw more attention to the caution display 610 to the player.

Further, in the fanfare middle decoration setting process, the first half portion and the second half portion are divided by the timer value, but may be divided by an event trigger such as input detection from a predetermined input portion.
[Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment]
The game machine 10 selectively performed the attention alert start point movement display or the attention alert end point movement display in the fourth embodiment. In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the alert clockwise movement display or the alert counterclockwise movement display starting and ending at the alert display 610 is selectively performed. First, a movement display effect having the attention display 610 as a start point and an end point will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a movement display effect in which the attention-calling display of the first modification of the fourth embodiment is set as a start point and an end point.

FIG. 142 (1) shows the alert clockwise movement display, and FIG. 142 (2) shows the alert counterclockwise movement display. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) is a light emitting unit that lights up according to the switching timing of turning on / off the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). The display mode can be switched so that is moved clockwise. At this time, the game machine 10 has the first arc-shaped light emitting group starting from the light emitting unit L06 located in the vicinity of the warning display 610 and ending in another light emitting unit L05 located in the vicinity of the warning display 610. Attention A clockwise movement display is performed. Further, the game machine 10 is careful about the second arc-shaped light emitting group, starting from the light emitting unit L13 located near the warning display 610 and ending at another light emitting unit L12 located near the warning display 610. Awakening Clockwise movement display is performed.

Further, the game machine 10 shown in (2) is turned on by switching between lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). The display mode can be switched so that the light emitting unit moves counterclockwise. At this time, the game machine 10 has the first arc-shaped light emitting group starting from the light emitting unit L05 located in the vicinity of the warning display 610 and ending in another light emitting unit L06 located in the vicinity of the warning display 610. Attention A counterclockwise movement display is performed. Further, the game machine 10 is careful about the second arc-shaped light emitting group, starting from the light emitting unit L12 located near the warning display 610 and ending at another light emitting unit L13 located near the warning display 610. Arousal counterclockwise movement display is performed.

Such a game machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to the attention alert display 610 at the start and end of the alert clockwise movement display or the alert counterclockwise movement display.

The gaming machine 10 may determine the alert clockwise movement display or the alert counterclockwise movement display depending on the model, or may determine it according to the gaming state. For example, the game machine 10 can be displayed as a warning clockwise movement display when performing a fanfare effect, and as a warning counterclockwise movement display when performing an ending effect.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may perform a mode of moving display effect (for example, a warning clockwise movement display or a warning counterclockwise movement display) in relation to notification of the game state. For example, the game machine 10 may notify the value of the jackpot (whether or not there is a probability fluctuation, whether or not there is a general electric support, the number of rounds, etc.) in association with the alert clockwise movement display or the alert counterclockwise movement display. According to this, the game machine 10 can draw more attention to the caution display 610 to the player.

Next, the switching timing of turning on / off of the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 in the caution clockwise movement display shown in FIG. 142 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode switching timing of the movement display effect in the first arc-shaped light emitting group and the second arc-shaped light emitting group of the modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 switches between lighting (ON) and extinguishing (OFF) of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) at predetermined time intervals. Attention A clockwise movement display is performed.

First, the game machine 10 turns off all the lights of the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) at the timing t10. As a result, the game machine 10 resets the player's attention. Next, the game machine 10 lights the light emitting units L06 and L13 at the timing t11, and continues to turn off the rest. As a result, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the light emitting units L06 and L13. Further, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the caution display 610 located in the vicinity of the light emitting units L06 and L13.

Next, the game machine 10 switches the light emitting units L06 and L13 from lighting to extinguishing at the timing t12, and switches the light emitting units L07 and L14 from extinguishing to lighting. As a result, the game machine 10 performs the attention alert clockwise movement display starting from the attention alert display 610. Further, the game machine 10 can improve the visibility of the alert display 610 after the player's attention by turning off the light emitting units L06 and L13 at the timing t12.

After that, the game machine 10 sequentially switches the light emitting units clockwise for each timing update for the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group), and the timing t22. Light emitting units L05 and L12 are turned on, and the rest are turned off. As a result, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the light emitting units L05 and L12. Further, the game machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the caution display 610 located in the vicinity of the light emitting units L05 and L12.

The gaming machine 10 may return to the timing t0, turn off all the lights, and loop the display mode switching of the timings t10 to t22, or may shift to another fluctuation pattern after going through the timings t10 to t22. Good. In addition, the movement display effect including the caution clockwise movement display may be a display effect in which the lighting mode moves from one end to the other end of the row formed by the plurality of light emitting units, and switching between single color lighting and extinguishing may be sufficient. Other display modes can be applied, including switching of display color, switching of blinking cycle, switching of lighting intensity, and switching of timing of rainbow color display as described in the third embodiment.

Since such a game machine 10 always posts the attention alert display 610, the attention level to the attention alert display 610 can be sufficiently improved by the caution alert clockwise movement display. Further, since the game machine 10 does not newly call attention by a display device or the like, it is possible to limit the decline in the interest of the game. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group) achieve both an improvement in attention to the attention alert display 610 and an effect display. To do.

The game machine 10 alerts the user to the timing of switching between lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 shown in FIG. 143 by switching the timings t11 to t22 in the reverse order after the timing t10. It is possible to realize a counter-measurement movement display.

[Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the game machine 10 is provided with a warning display 610 at the upper part in the game area. The second modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a warning display is provided at a position where the player can confirm the firing force of the game ball.

The position where the warning display of the second modification of the fourth embodiment is provided will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of a warning display according to a modification 2 of the fourth embodiment.
The game board 30 includes an inner rail 611 and an outer rail 612 formed in an arc shape as the guide rail 31. The game ball launched from the hit ball launching device (not shown) passes between the inner rail 611 and the outer rail 612, passes through the return prevention valve 613, and enters the game area. The game ball having a large firing force is de-energized by the return rubber 614. Therefore, the player confirms the launching force of the game ball in the arcuate range (launching force confirmation range 615) from the position where the game ball is launched from the hitting ball launching device and becomes visible to the return rubber 614, and the game ball. Adjust the firing force of.

The attention alert display 616 is provided at a position within the firing force confirmation range 615 where the game ball is launched from the hitting ball launching device and can be visually recognized. Further, the caution display 617 is provided at a position in the firing force confirmation range 615 before the game ball passes through the return prevention valve 613. Further, the warning display 618 is provided at a position in the firing force confirmation range 615 after the game ball has passed the return prevention valve 613. Further, the warning display 619 is provided at a position adjacent to the return rubber 614 in the firing force confirmation range 615.

As described above, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the fourth embodiment is provided with a warning display in the launch force confirmation range 615. Since most of the players confirm the launching force of the game ball at the start of the game, the game machine 10 provides the alerting display in the launching force confirmation range 615 to make the player pay attention to the alerting display at the start of the game. be able to. Further, the launch force confirmation range 615 is out of the player's attention range during the game when most of the players confirm the launch force of the game ball at the start of the game. Therefore, the launch force confirmation range 615 is unlikely to be an obstacle in the game production even though it is always posted. On the other hand, the launch force confirmation range 615 is in a position where it is difficult to sufficiently fulfill the original purpose of drawing the player's attention to the warning display during the game. However, the game machine 10 achieves both the game effect and the alerting by performing the movement display effect.

The game machine 10 may be provided with one or two or more of the warning displays 616 to 619. By notifying the effect control device 300 of the model-dependent information from the game control device 100, the game machine 10 can perform the corresponding movement display effect regardless of which of the alert displays 616 to 619 is provided. it can.

Further, the game board 30 may be capable of irradiating the caution indications 616 to 619 from the back surface by a required light emitting unit using a transparent member such as resin as a substrate. In this case, the game machine 10 can emit the attention alert display 616 to 619 in conjunction with the movement display effect, and the attention level of the attention alert display 616 to 619 can be further improved.

Next, a movement display effect when the game machine 10 is provided with the alert display 619 will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a movement display effect in which the attention display of the second modification of the fourth embodiment is set as a start point or an end point.

FIG. 145 (1) shows the attention alert start point movement display, and FIG. 145 (2) shows the attention alert end point movement display. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) and (2) has a predetermined emission color (for example, a second arc-shaped light emitting group) for each light emitting unit L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) and light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). , "Red") can be switched on and off according to the position of the light emitting unit, so that the lighting display can be moved.

The game machine 10 shown in (1) has light emitting units L06, L07, L13, L14 arranged far from the light emitting units L06, L07, L13, and L14 arranged near the attention display 619, starting from the attention display 619. The lighting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 are switched on and off so that the lighting display moves toward L10 and L17. With such a display (warning start point movement display), the game machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the warning display 619.

Further, the game machine 10 shown in (2) has a light emitting unit L06, L0B, L10, L17 arranged far from the light emitting units L00, L0B, L10, L17 arranged near the attention display 619, with the attention display 619 as the end point. The lighting units L00 to L0B and the light emitting units L10 to L17 are switched on and off so that the lighting display moves toward L07, L13, and L14. With such a display (warning end point movement display), the game machine 10 can direct the player to pay attention to the warning display 619.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the movement display effect corresponding to the position of the caution display 619.
The caution display 619 is located at a position where the light emitting units L00 to L0B (first arc-shaped light emitting group) are divided into left and right light emitting units L00 to L06 and light emitting units L07 to L0B, and the light emitting units L10 to L17 (second arc-shaped light emitting group). The arc-shaped light emitting group) is divided into left and right light emitting parts L10 to L13 and light emitting parts L14 to L17. That is, the light emitting units L00 to L06 function as the first row light emitting group with respect to the warning display 619, and the light emitting units L07 to L0B function as the second row light emitting group with respect to the warning display 619, and the light emitting units L10 to L13 functions as a third row light emitting group with respect to the warning display 619, and the light emitting units L14 to L17 function as a fourth row light emitting group with respect to the warning display 619. As a result, the four row-shaped light emitting groups are arranged so that one end thereof is directed toward the warning display 619, and the game machine 10 can make the warning display 619 more clearly noticed by the four row-shaped light emitting groups. it can.

[Fanfare medium decoration setting process]
Here, the fanfare intermediate decoration setting process that realizes the movement display effect performed corresponding to the position of the caution display 619 will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a fanfare intermediate decoration setting process in the effect control device of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. The decoration setting process during fanfare is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300) in step D90 of the decoration setting process. As for the decoration pattern set by the decoration setting process during fanfare, the first half is set as the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the position of the alert display, and the latter half is set as the normal fanfare display.

[Step D1011] The control unit branches processing according to a timer value indicating the passage of time during fanfare. The control unit proceeds to step D1031 when the timer value indicates "first half of fanfare", and proceeds to step D1021 when the timer value indicates "second half of fanfare".

[Step D1021] The control unit executes the fanfare second half decoration setting process when the timer value indicates "fanfare second half". In the fanfare second half decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, the rainbow color display effect shown in FIG. 118) indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. As a result, the game machine 10 performs a decorative display in the latter half of the fanfare indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit. After executing the fanfare second half decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D1031] The control unit determines the position of the alert display that the player wants to pay attention to. For example, when the game machine 10 posts only one warning display, the control unit determines the position of the warning display as the position of the warning display that the player wants to pay attention to. In addition, when the game machine 10 posts two or more warning displays, the control unit wants the player to pay attention to the position of the warning display selected according to the gaming state among the posted warning displays. Judge as the position of the awakening display.

When the position of the attention alert display that the player wants to pay attention to is the position A (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 616), the control unit proceeds to step D1041 and corresponds to the position B (for example, the attention alert display 617). In the case of position (for example), the process proceeds to step D1051, in the case of position C (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 618), the process proceeds to step D1061, and in the case of position D (for example, the position corresponding to the alert display 619). Step D1071 proceeds.

[Step D1041] The control unit executes the attention A start point decoration setting process. The game machine 10 performs the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the position A by the attention alert A start point decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position A (for example, the position corresponding to the caution display 616). After executing the attention A start point decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D1051] The control unit executes the attention alert B start point decoration setting process. The game machine 10 performs the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the position B by the attention alert B start point decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position B (for example, the position corresponding to the caution display 617). The control unit executes the attention B start point decoration setting process, and then ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D1061] The control unit executes the alert C start point decoration setting process. The game machine 10 performs the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the position C by the attention alert C start point decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position C (for example, the position corresponding to the attention display 618). After executing the attention C start point decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

[Step D1071] The control unit executes the alert D start point decoration setting process. The game machine 10 performs the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the position D by the attention alert D start point decoration setting process. As a result, the game machine 10 directs the player to pay attention to the position D (for example, the position corresponding to the caution display 619). After executing the alert D start point decoration setting process, the control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the game effect when the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit due to the rainbow color display effect. In addition, the game machine 10 can perform the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the position of the alert alert display in cooperation with the rainbow color display effect. As a result, the game machine 10 can improve the degree of attention to the attention alert display while continuing the game effect associated with the result of the variable display game becoming a big hit. That is, the game machine 10 can achieve both the alerting to the player and the game production.

In addition, although the game production during the fanfare is shown as an example of the attention alert start point movement display, it may be during the round, the ending, the fluctuation, or the like. Further, the game machine 10 may display the attention alert start point movement display every time a predetermined time elapses, and may further display the attention alert start point movement display corresponding to the game state when the predetermined time elapses. Good.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may determine the alert display position in relation to the notification of the gaming state. For example, the game machine 10 may notify the value of the jackpot (whether or not there is a probability fluctuation, whether or not there is a general electric support, the number of rounds, etc.) in association with the position of the alert display. According to this, the game machine 10 can draw more attention to the alert display to the player.

Further, in the fanfare middle decoration setting process, the first half portion and the second half portion are divided by the timer value, but may be divided by an event trigger such as input detection from a predetermined input portion.
Further, in the fanfare middle decoration setting process, the attention alert start point movement display is performed as a movement display effect, but the attention alert end point movement display, the alert alert clockwise movement display, the alert alert counterclockwise movement display, and the like may be used. ..

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the first and second modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units (row light emitting groups) arranged in a row on the front side. The game machine 10 posts a warning display (warning display 610, 616 to 619) on one end side of the row light emitting group. The game machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit switches a display mode (movement display effect) in which a plurality of light emitting units move from one end to the other end of the row or from the other end to one end.

(2) The attention alert display (attention alert display 610) is formed by a row formed by the first row light emitting group (light emitting unit L00 to L0B) and a second row light emitting group (light emitting unit L10 to L17). It is in a position to be sandwiched between the rows.

(3) The first row-shaped light emitting group (light emitting unit L00 to L0B) is in the vicinity of the caution display (warning display 610), and the first divided row-shaped light emitting group (light emitting unit L00 to L05) and the second. Switching (movement) of the display mode, which is divided into the divided row light emitting groups (light emitting units L06 to L0B), and the lighting mode moves in one or both of the first divided row light emitting group and the second divided row light emitting group. Display production).

(4) The second row-shaped light emitting group (light emitting units L10 to L17) is in the vicinity of the caution display (warning display 610), and the third divided row-shaped light emitting group (light emitting units L10 to L13) and the fourth. Switching (movement) of the display mode, which is divided into the divided row-shaped light emitting groups (light emitting units L14 to L17), and the lighting mode moves in one or both of the third divided row-shaped light emitting group and the fourth divided row-shaped light emitting group. Display production).

(5) The alert display (attention display 610) is posted on the game board in a range where the launch force of the game ball can be confirmed (launch force confirmation range 615).
(6) In (3) and (4), the control unit sets the first row light emitting group or the second row light emitting group according to the position of the warning display (warning display 610, 616 to 619). Division Select the division position to divide into the row-shaped light emitting group.

(7) The control unit determines the mode of the movement display effect based on the model-dependent information.
(8) The control unit performs a movement display starting from one end at the start of fanfare.
(9) The control unit displays a movement with one end as the end point at the end of the fanfare.

(10) The control unit performs a movement display starting from one end of the first split row light emitting group, and then performs a movement display starting from the other end of the second divided row light emitting group (caution). Clockwise movement display or alert counterclockwise movement display).

(11) The control unit determines the mode of the movement display effect in relation to the notification of the gaming state.
(12) The control unit determines the alert display position in relation to the notification of the game state.
(13) In (11) and (12), the notification of the gaming state includes the value of the jackpot (whether or not there is a probability fluctuation, whether or not there is support for a general electric train, the number of rounds, etc.).

(14) The lighting mode to be moved includes switching between lighting and extinguishing, switching of display color, switching of blinking cycle, switching of lighting intensity, and switching of timing of rainbow color display.
[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment emphasizes the light emitting mode of the predetermined decorative portion to call attention to the player. First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the game machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and the light emitting mode will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a decorative portion and a light emitting mode in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

The game machine 10 includes a frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L composed of a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is a form of the row light emitting group.

Further, the game machine 10 includes a center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The center case 40 has an inner edge light emitting group 40L composed of a plurality of light emitting parts. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is a form of the row light emitting group.

From one point of view, the front frame 12 and the center case 40 can be non-game progress related parts that are not related to the game progress. Further, the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L can be used as a non-game progress related decorative part for decorating the non-game progress related part. The outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L are examples of the non-game progress related decoration unit, and the non-game progress related decoration unit may be any one that decorates the non-game progress related decoration unit. For example, the light emitting unit of the option setting unit 25 is a non-game progress related decoration unit.

Further, the game board 30 includes game board constituent members such as a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special variable winning device 38. Further, the game board 30 includes a start winning opening light emitting unit 36L that decorates the starting winning opening 36 in a light emitting mode, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L that decorates the normal variable winning device 37 in a light emitting mode, and a special variable winning device 38. A special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L decorated with a light emitting mode is provided.

The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38 can be, from one viewpoint, a game progress-related unit related to the game progress according to a predetermined game state. That is, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38 can be either a game progress-related section or a non-game progress-related section depending on the game state. Further, the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L can be used as a game progress related decoration unit for decorating the game progress related unit.

The starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L may be only one light emitting unit, or may be a light emitting group composed of two or more light emitting units. There may be. Further, the start winning port light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L are integrally formed with these game board constituent members and directly irradiate the game board constituent members. Alternatively, the player may be irradiated from the game board constituent member. Further, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L are configured separately from the game board constituent members and indirectly irradiate the game board constituent members. Alternatively, the player may be irradiated from the vicinity of the game board constituent members.

For example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L are full-color LEDs capable of switching a plurality of emission colors to emit light. However, other light emitting means such as a monochromatic LED or a lamp may be used.

The outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L decorate the game machine 10 in a synchronized light emitting mode. For example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L perform movement display in the same direction (for example, the lighting position is switched counterclockwise at a cycle of 400 ms) by monochromatic lighting or rainbow color display effect. As described above, the game machine 10 can improve the interest according to the game state by performing the coordinated production in which the switching of the light emitting modes of the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L is synchronized.

On the other hand, the game machine 10 has a light emitting mode (for example, 100 ms) asynchronous with the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L with respect to the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, or the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Cycle white flashing). As a result, the game machine 10 distinguishes the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, or the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L from the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L. Can be made to. As a result, in the game machine 10, even if the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L perform a cooperative production, the player can easily recognize the special variation winning device 38 during the big hit, or the normal variation during the normal electric support. The winning device 37 can be easily recognized by the player, and the starting winning opening 36 in the normal state can be easily recognized.

Next, the correspondence between the progress of the special figure game and the game production will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a correspondence relationship between the progress of the special figure game and the game effect of the fifth embodiment. Here, the game state transition of the special figure game is shown, and the game effects of the non-game progress-related decoration unit and the game progress-related decoration unit in each game state will be described.

The game state transition process of the special figure game shown is a fanfare at timing T11, a big hit at timing T12 (during a round), an ending at timing T13, and a timing T14 through special figure fluctuations without electric support (during fluctuations without electric support). Shows the special figure fluctuation with general electric support (during change with electric support).

A game effect without hatching indicates a synchronous game effect that is synchronized with another game effect without hatching, and a game effect with hatching indicates a game effect that is not synchronized with other game effects, that is, an asynchronous game effect.

For example, in the gaming state during fluctuation without electric support, the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L perform a synchronous game effect, and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L are also in a non-game progress relationship. Performs a synchronized game production synchronized with the decoration section. The outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L perform the synchronous game effect even during the fanfare or the ending. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform a game effect with a sense of unity as a whole.

On the other hand, in the big hit game state, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L, which is one of the game progress-related decoration units, performs an asynchronous game effect that is not synchronized with the others. As a result, the game machine 10 can alert the player to the special variable winning device 38. That is, since the special variable winning device 38 is greatly related to the profit of the player in the game progress in the game state of the big hit, the game machine 10 protects the profit of the player at the expense of a part of the unity of the game production. I am trying to.

Further, in the changing game state with electric support, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, which is one of the game progress-related decoration units, performs an asynchronous game effect which is a game effect that is not synchronized with the others. As a result, the game machine 10 can alert the player to the normal variable winning device 37. That is, since the normal variable winning device 37 is greatly related to the profit of the player in the game progress in the changing game state with electric support, the game machine 10 sacrifices a part of the unity of the game production. We are trying to protect the interests of people.

In this way, the game machine 10 aims to both alert the player and the game production by performing an asynchronous game production in which the game progress-related decoration unit according to the game state is not synchronized with the other decoration parts. ..

The light emitting unit (including the light emitting group) performs a game effect according to a light emitting mode, and the voice output unit performs a game effect according to a voice mode such as music, sound effects, and voice. Further, the game effect is not limited to this, and may include an operation mode by the board effect device 44, a vibration mode by a vibration generator such as a vibrator, and the like.

It should be noted that the asynchronous game effect in the game progress-related decoration unit is not only asynchronous with the other light emitting units, but also asynchronous with the audio output. As a result, the game machine 10 aims to further improve the degree of attention to the game progress-related decoration unit that performs the asynchronous game production.

Next, the asynchronous game effect will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the correspondence relationship between the synchronous game effect and the asynchronous game effect in the jackpot game state of the fifth embodiment.

After the gaming state becomes a big hit at the timing T12, the game machine 10 performs a game effect in the light emitting mode P1 for the inner edge light emitting group 40L, and performs a game effect in the light emitting mode P2 for the outer edge light emitting group 18L, and emits light from the normal variable winning device. A game effect is performed on the unit 37L in the light emitting mode P4. Each of the light emitting modes P1, P2, and P4 has a cycle TS1, and when the first cycle game effect is started from the timing T12 and the first cycle game effect is finished at the timing T123, the second cycle game effect is started. To do. In this way, the game machine 10 repeatedly executes the light emitting modes P1, P2, and P4 for the inner edge light emitting group 40L, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, and the ordinary variable winning device light emitting unit 37L during the big hit gaming state.

On the other hand, after the game state becomes a big hit at the timing T12, the game machine 10 performs a game effect on the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L in the light emitting mode P3. The light emitting mode P3 is a periodic TS2 different from the periodic TS1. The game machine 10 provides a time lag TL1 after the timing T12 to start the game production of the first cycle from the timing T121, and when the game production of the first cycle is completed at the timing T122, the game production of the second cycle is started. .. In this way, the game machine 10 repeatedly executes the light emitting mode P3 for the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L during the game state of the big hit.

In this way, the game machine 10 alerts the player to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L by changing the timing of the start trigger of the light emitting mode P3 from the start trigger of the light emitting modes P1, P2, P4. Can be emphasized further. Further, the game machine 10 further emphasizes the alerting to the player to the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L by changing the timing of the repeating trigger of the light emitting mode P3 from the repeating trigger of the light emitting modes P1, P2, P4. it can. Further, the game machine 10 can further emphasize the attention to the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L to the player by differentiating the repeating cycle of the light emitting mode P3 from the repeating cycle of the light emitting modes P1, P2, P4. The game machine 10 may have a cycle TS2 shorter than the cycle TS1, which allows the game machine 10 to further emphasize the alerting of the player to the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L.

It should be noted that the asynchronous game effect in the game progress-related decoration unit is not only asynchronous with the other light emitting units, but also asynchronous with the audio output. Therefore, the light emitting mode P3 and the voice output mode P5 have different start triggers, repeat triggers, or repeat cycles. Therefore, the game machine 10 can further emphasize the attention to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L even to the player who is listening to the sound.

[Decoration setting process during round]
Next, the switching control between the synchronous game effect and the asynchronous game effect for the decorative portion will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the decoration setting process during the round in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process described in the third embodiment.

[Step D121] The control unit sets the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L as the game progress-related decoration unit. The setting of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to the game progress related decorative part is based on the fact that the special variable winning device 38 is related to the game progress during the round (during the big hit) and therefore corresponds to the game progress related part.

[Step D122] The control unit sets a light emitting unit other than the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L as a non-game progress related decorative unit. Special variable prize device The light emitting part other than the light emitting part 38L is set to the non-game progress related part because the remaining decoration target part is not related to the game progress during the round (during the big hit). By equivalent.

[Step D123] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the A loop setting. The A loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern in the cycle A.
[Step D124] The control unit sets a decoration pattern during the round for the game progress-related decoration unit. As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration by the decoration pattern during the round on the game progress-related decoration unit in the cycle A.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the B loop setting. The B loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern in a cycle B different from the cycle A.
[Step D126] The control unit sets a decoration pattern during the round for the non-game progress related decoration unit. As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration by the decoration pattern during the round on the non-game progress related decoration part in the cycle B. The control unit sets the decoration pattern during the round for the non-game progress-related decoration unit, and then ends the decoration setting process during the round.

In this way, the game machine 10 can switch between the synchronous game effect and the asynchronous game effect on the decorative portion according to the game state.
[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. The gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment emphasizes the light emitting mode of the predetermined decorative portion according to the state when the power is turned on to alert the player. First, the light emitting mode of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a decorative portion and a light emitting mode in the gaming machine of the first modification of the fifth embodiment.

The game machine 10 determines the game progress-related decoration unit according to the state when the power is turned on (including power failure recovery), and controls the game progress-related decoration unit in a light emitting mode asynchronous with the non-game progress-related decoration unit.
For example, in the case of the game machine 10 recovering from the power cutoff during a big hit when the power is turned on, as shown in (1), the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is determined as the game progress-related decoration unit, and is special. The variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a light emitting mode asynchronous with other light emitting units (for example, white blinking with a cycle of 100 ms). As a result, even if the display device 41 cannot display the display contents before the power is cut off at the time of recovery from the power cutoff, the game machine 10 attempts to alert the player to the special variable winning device 38 and plays the game. It is possible to protect the interests of the person.

Further, in the game machine 10, when the state at the time of power-on is recovery from the power cutoff during the normal power support, as shown in (2), the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L is determined as the game progress-related decoration unit. The light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device is set to a light emitting mode asynchronous with other light emitting units (for example, white blinking with a cycle of 100 ms). As a result, even if the display device 41 cannot display the display contents before the power is cut off at the time of recovery from the power cutoff, the game machine 10 attempts to alert the player to the normal variable winning device 37 and plays the game. It is possible to protect the interests of the person.

Further, in the case of the game machine 10 when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on or when the game is restored from the normal gaming state, although not shown, the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L is determined as the game progress-related decoration unit, and the starting winning opening light emitting The unit 36L has a light emitting mode asynchronous with other light emitting units (for example, white blinking with a cycle of 100 ms). As a result, even if the start from RAM clear is notified by another light emitting unit or the display device 41 cannot display the display contents before the power is cut off when recovering from the power cutoff, the game machine 10 can play a game. It is possible to call attention to the start winning opening 36 and protect the interests of the player.

Next, the determination of the game progress-related decoration unit according to the state at the time of turning on the power (including the recovery from the power failure) and the control of the light emitting mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154. First, the decoration setting process of the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration setting processing in the effect control device of the first modification of the fifth embodiment.

[Decoration setting process]
The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process described in the third embodiment.

[Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit proceeds to step D82A when the game state is "power on", proceeds to step D84A when the game state is "power failure recovery", and proceeds to step D86 when the game state is "waiting for customers". When the game state is "changing", the process proceeds to step D88, when the game state is "symbol stopped", the process proceeds to step D89, when the game state is "fanfare", the process proceeds to step D90, and the game state is "fanfare". If "in the round", the process proceeds to step D91A, and if the game state is "ending", the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82A] The control unit executes the power-on decoration setting process. The power-on decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 153. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the changing decoration setting process. Note that "power on" is a state in which the power is started without maintaining the state when the power is cut off, and is accompanied by, for example, RAM clearing.

[Step D84A] The control unit executes the power failure recovery decoration setting process. The power failure recovery decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the power failure recovery decoration setting process. In addition, "power failure recovery" is a state in which the state when the power is cut off is maintained and started.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The control unit executes the customer waiting demo decoration setting process while waiting for customers (state). The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the customer waiting demo decoration setting process.

[Step D88] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the game state is "changing", that is, the changing display game is being executed. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the changing decoration setting process.

[Step D89] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped when the game state is "stopped symbol", that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped.

[Step D90] The control unit executes the fanfare middle decoration setting process when the game state is "fanfare in progress", that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during fanfare.

[Step D91A] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during the round when the game state is "during the round", that is, when each round in the jackpot state is executed. The control unit finishes the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the round. The decoration setting process during the round can be the decoration setting process during the round of the fifth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 150.

[Step D92] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during ending when the game state is "ending", that is, the ending process indicating that the jackpot state has ended is executed. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the ending.

[Power-on decoration setting process]
Next, the power-on decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a power-on decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first modification of the fifth embodiment. The power-on decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D82A of the decoration setting process.

[Step D131] The control unit sets the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L as the game progress-related decoration unit. The setting of the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L to the game progress-related decoration unit is due to the fact that the start winning opening 36 is related to the game progress when the power is turned on and therefore corresponds to the game progress-related unit.

[Step D132] The control unit sets the light emitting unit other than the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L as the non-game progress related decorative unit. The setting of the light emitting part other than the start winning opening light emitting part 36L to the non-game progress related decoration part is due to the fact that the remaining decoration target part is not related to the game progress when the power is turned on, and therefore corresponds to the non-game progress related part. ..

[Step D133] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the A loop setting. The A loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern in the cycle A.
[Step D134] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern for the game progress-related decoration unit. As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration of the game progress-related decoration unit in the power-on decoration pattern in the cycle A.

[Step D135] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the B loop setting. The B loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern in a cycle B different from the cycle A.
[Step D136] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern for the non-game progress-related decoration unit. As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration by the power-on decoration pattern on the non-game progress-related decoration unit in the cycle B. The control unit sets the power-on decoration pattern for the non-game progress-related decoration unit, and then ends the power-on decoration setting process.

As a result, the game machine 10 can achieve both decoration at the time of turning on the power and alerting to the starting winning opening 36. For example, when the power is turned on with the RAM cleared, the game machine 10 controls the non-gaming progress-related decoration unit in a light emitting mode for calling the game hall staff to call attention to an illegal power-on operation. At this time, since the game machine 10 controls the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L asynchronously with the non-game progress related decoration unit, it is possible to guarantee the protection of the interests of the well-meaning player. Therefore, on one aspect, the game machine 10 can both alert the game hall staff and the player.

[Power failure recovery decoration setting process]
Next, the power failure recovery decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a power failure recovery decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first modification of the fifth embodiment. The power failure recovery decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D84A of the decoration setting process.

[Step D141] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the B loop setting. The B loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern in the cycle B.
[Step D142] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state when the power is cut off. The control unit proceeds to step D143 when the game state when the power is cut off is "during electric support (during normal power support)", and proceeds to step D145 when the game state when the power is cut off is "during big hit", and the game state is changed. In the case of "Other (neither during electric support nor during jackpot)", the process proceeds to step D147.

The control unit (effect control device 300) can acquire the game state when the power is cut off from the game control device 100. The effect control device 300 receives a power-on command from the game control device 100 after the power is turned on. The power-on command includes various information such as model designation, decorative special figure 1 hold number, decorative special figure 2 hold number, and probability information. Further, the power-on command includes power-on information for determining whether or not the power-on is a power failure recovery that restores the state before the power is cut off. The effect control device 300 executes a process associated with power-on recovery when the power-on information indicates power-out recovery, and executes a process involving power-on when the power-on information does not indicate power failure recovery. The power-on command also includes information about the state before the power was turned off. As a result, the effect control device 300 can determine the game progress-related decoration unit based on the state before the power is cut off. The power-on command is one of the single-shot commands, and is processed by the single-shot command processing (see FIG. 127) in step D62 of the received command analysis processing.

[Step D143] The control unit sets the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L as the game progress-related decoration unit in the case of "during electric support". The setting of the light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device to the game progress related decorative part is based on the fact that the normal variable winning device 37 is related to the game progress during the normal electric support and therefore corresponds to the game progress related part.

[Step D144] The control unit sets a light emitting unit other than the light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device as a non-game progress related decorative unit. The setting of the light emitting part other than the normal variable winning device light emitting part 37L to the non-game progress related decoration part corresponds to the non-game progress related part because the other decoration target part is not related to the game progress during the normal electric support. It depends.

[Step D145] The control unit sets the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L as the game progress-related decoration unit in the case of "big hit". The setting of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to the game progress related decorative part is based on the fact that the special variable winning device 38 is related to the game progress during the big hit and therefore corresponds to the game progress related part.

[Step D146] The control unit sets a light emitting unit other than the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L as a non-game progress related decorative unit. The setting of the light emitting part other than the special variable winning device light emitting part 38L to the non-game progress related decoration part is due to the fact that the remaining decoration target part is not related to the game progress during the big hit and therefore corresponds to the non-game progress related part. ..

[Step D147] In the case of "Other", the control unit sets all the light emitting units to the non-game progress related decoration unit. All light emitting parts are set to the non-game progress related decoration part because all the decoration target parts are not related to the game progress in the game state at the time of power failure recovery except during normal power support and big hit. By corresponding to.

The settings of the game progress-related decoration unit and the non-game progress-related decoration unit in each game state may differ depending on the models having different game characteristics.
[Step D148] The control unit sets a power failure recovery decoration pattern for the non-game progress related decoration unit. As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration by the power failure recovery decoration pattern on the non-game progress related decoration unit in the cycle B.

[Step D149] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to the A loop setting. The A loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern in a cycle A different from the cycle B.
[Step D150] The control unit sets a power failure recovery decoration pattern for the game progress-related decoration unit. As a result, the game machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration of the game progress-related decoration unit in the power failure recovery decoration pattern in the cycle A. The control unit sets the power failure recovery decoration pattern for the game progress-related decoration unit, and then ends the power failure recovery decoration setting process. For example, the power failure recovery decoration pattern set in the game progress-related decoration unit includes white blinking for 100 ms and white lighting. Further, the power failure recovery decoration pattern set in the game progress-related decoration unit may be an enhanced light emission mode in which the light emission mode is emphasized more than the power failure recovery decoration pattern set in the non-game progress-related decoration unit. For example, the power failure recovery decoration pattern set in the game progress-related decoration unit may have a higher brightness than the power failure recovery decoration pattern set in the non-game progress-related decoration unit, and the brightness and color switching cycle may be shorter. It may be a thing or the like.

In addition, such an enhanced light emitting mode may be limited to a predetermined time (for example, a preset time sufficiently longer than the cycle A or an event trigger such as winning detection in the game progress related portion). ..

As a result, the game machine 10 can achieve both decoration at the time of recovery from a power failure and alerting to the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a light emitting mode corresponding to the current gaming state even if the display content of the display device 41 cannot be restored and the player cannot sufficiently inform the player of the current gaming state at the time of power failure recovery. Controls the non-game progress related decoration part. At this time, since the game machine 10 controls the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L or the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L asynchronously with the non-game progress related decoration unit, the profit protection of the player can be guaranteed. Therefore, on one side, the game machine 10 can achieve both a game effect according to the game state and a warning to the player.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified example 1) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration unit, a non-game progress-related decoration unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress-related unit (for example, the special variation winning device 38) related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The non-game progress-related decorative portion (for example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L) decorates the non-game progress related portion (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) not related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The control unit asynchronously controls the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit and the light-emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decorative unit in a specific game state (for example, a big hit) in which the player can advantageously advance the game.

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) has a first game progress-related decoration unit (for example, a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) and a second game progress-related decoration unit (for example, ordinary) as a game progress-related decoration unit. A variable winning device light emitting unit 37L) is provided. The first game progress-related decoration unit and the second game progress-related decoration unit decorate the game progress-related part in different game states (for example, the special variation prize device light emitting unit 38L has a special variation prize during a big hit. The device 38 is decorated, and the light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device decorates the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal electric support).

The control unit sets the light emitting mode of the first game progress-related decoration unit and the light emitting mode of the second game progress-related decoration unit in the asynchronous control as a common light emitting mode (for example, white blinking in a cycle of 100 ms).

(3) The game machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration unit, a non-game progress-related decoration unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress-related unit (for example, the special variation winning device 38) related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The non-game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L) decorates the non-game progress related part (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) not related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The control unit synchronously controls the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit and the light-emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decorative unit in the first gaming state (for example, the normal state), and the player can perform the light emitting mode more than in the first gaming state. In a second gaming state (for example, a big hit) in which the game can proceed advantageously, the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit and the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decorative unit are asynchronously controlled.

(4) In the game machine 10 of (3), the control unit sets the timing at which the start trigger of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit coincides with the start trigger of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress related decorative unit in the synchronous control. In the asynchronous control, the timing at which the start trigger of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit and the start trigger of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decorative unit do not match (for example, timing T12 and timing T121 in FIG. 149) are set.

(5) In the game machine 10 of (3), the control unit sets the timing at which the repetition trigger of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decoration unit and the repetition trigger of the light emission mode of the non-game progress-related decoration unit coincide with each other in the synchronous control. In the asynchronous control, the timing at which the repeated trigger of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit and the repeated trigger of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decorative unit do not match (for example, the timing T122 and the timing T123 in FIG. 149) are set.

(6) In the game machine 10 of (3), the control unit makes the repeating cycle of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit coincide with the repeating cycle of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress related decorative unit in the synchronous control, and asynchronously controls In, the repeating cycle of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decorative unit and the repeating cycle of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decorative unit are set to be inconsistent (for example, the cycle TS1 and the cycle TS2 in FIG. 149).

(7) In the game machine 10 of (3), the control unit performs a shorter cycle (for example, a cycle with respect to the cycle TS1 in FIG. 149) by comparing the repeating cycle of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decoration unit with the synchronous control in the asynchronous control. Let it be TS2).

(8) In the game machine 10 of (7), the short-cycle light emitting mode includes lighting.
(9) The game machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration unit, a non-game progress-related decoration unit, a voice effect unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress-related unit (for example, the special variation winning device 38) related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The non-game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L) decorates the non-game progress related part (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) not related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The sound production unit (for example, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b) produces a sound output. The control unit asynchronously controls the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decoration unit with the voice output in the game state (for example, a big hit) in which the player can advance the game advantageously, and sets the light emission mode of the non-game progress-related decoration unit to the voice output. Synchronous control is performed (for example, the period from timing T12 to timing T13 in FIG. 148).

(10) In the game machine 10 of (9), the control unit sets the timing at which the start trigger of the predetermined voice output by the voice production unit and the start trigger of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decoration unit do not match, and the sound production unit determines. The timing (for example, timing T12 and timing T121 in FIG. 149) coincides with the start trigger of the predetermined audio output and the start trigger of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decoration unit.

(11) In the game machine 10 of (9), the control unit sets the timing at which the repetition trigger of the predetermined voice output by the voice production unit and the repetition trigger of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decoration unit do not match, and the sound production unit determines. The timing (for example, timing T122 and timing T123 in FIG. 149) coincides with the repetition trigger of the predetermined audio output and the repetition trigger of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decoration unit.

(12) In the game machine 10 of (9), the control unit disagrees with the repetition cycle of the predetermined voice output by the sound production unit and the repetition cycle of the light emitting mode of the game progress-related decoration unit, and the control unit determines the predetermined sound output by the sound production unit. It is assumed that the repetition cycle of the sound output and the repetition cycle of the light emitting mode of the non-game progress-related decoration unit are the same (for example, the cycle TS1 and the cycle TS2 in FIG. 149).

(13) The game machine 10 includes a game progress-related decoration unit, a non-game progress-related decoration unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L) decorates the game progress-related unit (for example, the special variation winning device 38) related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. The non-game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L) decorates the non-game progress related part (for example, the front frame 12 and the center case 40) not related to the game progress according to the light emitting mode. When the control unit detects that the power is turned on, the control unit controls the game progress-related decoration unit in a emphasized light emitting mode that is emphasized more than the non-game progress-related decoration unit.

(14) The game machine 10 of (13) has a first game progress-related decoration unit (for example, a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) and a second game progress-related decoration unit (for example, ordinary) as a game progress-related decoration unit. A variable winning device light emitting unit 37L) is provided. The control unit selects the first game progress-related decoration unit or the second game progress-related decoration unit as the decoration control target of the enhanced light emission mode based on the game state at the time of power off, which is restored after the power is turned on.

(15) In the game machine 10 of (13), the first game progress-related decoration unit decorates a special winning opening (for example, a special variable winning device 38) capable of winning in a special game state (for example, a big hit). , The control unit selects the first game progress-related decoration unit as the decoration control target of the enhanced light emission mode when the game state when the power is cut off is the special game state.

(16) In the game machine 10 of (13), the second game progress-related decoration unit decorates the specific winning opening (for example, the normal variable winning device 37), and the control unit specifies the game state when the power is cut off. When the game state is advantageous for the player regarding the winning of the winning opening (for example, during the support of the Fuden), the second game progress-related decoration unit is selected as the decoration control target of the emphasized light emission mode.

(17) In the game machine 10 of (13), the second game progress-related decoration unit (for example, the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L) is a winning opening (for example, a winning opening (for example, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L) that triggers the start of the variable display game executed by the variable display device. For example, when the start winning opening 36) is decorated and the control unit detects the reset of the game state when the power is cut off, the control unit selects the second game progress-related decoration unit as the decoration control target of the enhanced light emission mode.

(18) In the game machines 10 of (13) to (17), the control unit continues the enhanced light emission mode for a predetermined time.
(19) In the gaming machine 10 of (13) to (17), the control unit continues the enhanced light emitting mode until it receives an instruction of a new decorative mode.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159. The game machine 10 of the sixth embodiment makes it easy to distinguish between the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification (abnormality notification mode) and the light emitting mode of the game effect (game effect mode), and achieves both the game effect and the abnormality notification. .. First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the game machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment and the light emitting mode in the normal state (without abnormality and with abnormality) will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment and the light emitting mode in the normal state (without abnormality and with abnormality). The game machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode in a normal time (no abnormality), and the game machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode in a normal time (with an abnormality).

First, the configuration of the decorative portion (light emitting portion) of the game machine 10 will be described. The game machine 10 includes a frame decoration device 18, a push button light emitting unit 25L, and a plurality of light emitting units including a handle light emitting unit 24L on the front frame 12. The light emitting unit provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is a form of the main body frame light emitting unit. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L composed of a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is a form of the row light emitting group. The push button light emitting unit 25L decorates the push button (option setting unit) 25 in a predetermined light emitting mode. For example, the push button light emitting unit 25L may be the push button LEDs 250 to 258 described with reference to FIG. 117, or may be a separately provided light emitting unit. The handle light emitting unit 24L decorates the handle 24 according to a predetermined light emitting mode.

These main body frame light emitting units perform a game effect in a common light emitting mode in a plurality of game models, and also perform an abnormality notification in a common light emitting mode in a plurality of game models.
The game machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L, a start winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. The light emitting unit provided in the game board 30 is a form of the game board light emitting unit. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is a form of the row light emitting group. The start winning opening light emitting unit 36L decorates the starting winning opening 36 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The ordinary variable winning device light emitting unit 37L decorates the ordinary variable winning device 37 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L decorates the special variable winning device 38 according to a predetermined light emitting mode.

These game board light emitting units perform game production in a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model. The game machine 10 entrusts the abnormality notification to the main body frame light emitting unit, so that the game board light emitting unit does not perform the abnormality notification. In addition, the game machine 10 may perform the abnormality notification in cooperation with the main body frame light emitting unit by performing the abnormality notification in the game board light emitting unit in the light emitting mode corresponding to the game model.

Next, the abnormality notification in the normal time of the game machine 10 will be described. In addition, the normal time referred to here means a time when there is no big hit (game state). The game machine 10 shown in (1) has a light emitting mode in which the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit respectively correspond to the game state in a state where no abnormality has occurred. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (1), the same hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L each have a light emitting mode according to the game state. The main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit do not necessarily have to emit light from all the light emitting units. For example, the game machine 10 shown in (1) includes a push button light emitting unit 25L, a handle light emitting unit 24L, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. It is shown in white that is turned off or that the light emitting mode can be taken independently of the game state due to the occurrence of an event.

In the game machine 10 shown in (2), in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the light emitting portion of the game board has a light emitting mode according to the gaming state, and the light emitting portion of the main body has a light emitting mode corresponding to the abnormality. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (2), the inner edge light emitting group 40L is indicated by a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal line) that the inner edge light emitting group 40L is a light emitting mode according to the game state, and the outer edge light emitting group 18L is a light emitting mode corresponding to an abnormality. This is indicated by a hatch pattern (crossing diagonal lines).

In this way, in the game machine 10, in the normal state, if no abnormality occurs, the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit cooperate to produce a game effect, and if an abnormality occurs, the game board light emitting unit operates. It is in charge of game production, and the light emitting part of the main body frame is in charge of abnormality notification. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to distinguish between the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification in the normal time and the light emitting mode of the game effect, and makes the game hall staff recognize the abnormality of the game machine. Therefore, the game machine 10 has both a game effect and an abnormality notification in a normal time.

Next, the configuration of the decorative portion of the game machine 10 of the sixth embodiment and the light emitting mode at the time of a big hit (without abnormality and with abnormality) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment and the light emitting mode at the time of a big hit (no abnormality and with abnormality). The game machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode at the time of a big hit (no abnormality), and the game machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode at the time of a big hit (with an abnormality).

The game machine 10 shown in (1) has a light emitting mode in which the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit each correspond to a gaming state (big hit) in a state where no abnormality has occurred. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (1), the same hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L each have a light emitting mode according to the gaming state (big hit). Further, in the game machine 10 shown in (1), a clockwise arrow indicates that the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L are each clockwise rainbow color display.

The game machine 10 shown in (2) has a light emitting mode in which the game board light emitting unit corresponds to a game state (big hit) in a state where an abnormality has occurred, and a light emitting mode in which the main body light emitting unit corresponds to an abnormality during a big hit. Is. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (2), the inner edge light emitting group 40L indicates that the light emitting mode corresponds to the gaming state (big hit) by a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines), and the outer edge light emitting group 18L is abnormally during the big hit. A hatching pattern (horizontal line) indicates that the light emitting mode corresponds to that. Further, in the game machine 10 shown in (2), the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L is indicated by a clockwise rainbow color display by a clockwise arrow, and the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L is displayed in a counterclockwise rainbow color display. Is indicated by a counterclockwise arrow.

In this way, in the game machine 10, if no abnormality occurs during the big hit, the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit cooperate to produce a game effect, and if an abnormality occurs, the game board light emitting unit performs a game effect. It is in charge of game production, and the light emitting part of the main body frame is in charge of abnormality notification. At this time, the game machine 10 makes the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit different from the abnormality notification mode at the normal time. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to distinguish between the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification during the big hit and the light emitting mode of the game effect, and makes the game hall staff recognize the abnormality of the game machine. Therefore, the game machine 10 achieves both a game effect and an abnormality notification during a big hit.

The light emitting mode of the abnormality notification during such a big hit is that when the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L is a clockwise rainbow color display, the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L rotates in the opposite direction to the inner edge light emitting group 40L. It is a clockwise rainbow color display. The light emitting mode of such an abnormality notification is a light emitting mode that gives an observer (for example, a game hall staff member) a sense of discomfort by comparative observation with a game effect when no abnormality has occurred. Therefore, such a game machine 10 can notify the abnormal state by giving the observer a sense of discomfort.

Further, such a game machine 10 can change the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification in response to the game board light emitting unit that changes the light emitting mode according to the game state. Therefore, the game machine 10 can set a larger alerting force than setting the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification to the common light emitting mode for all the gaming states. For example, even if the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit during the big hit and the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting unit at the normal time are similar, the game machine 10 notifies the abnormality of the main body frame light emitting unit during the big hit. It is possible to set the alert power during the big hit by changing the light emission mode of. That is, conventionally, the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit that weakens the alerting force of the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting unit is avoided, but such a game machine 10 is a big hit. The degree of freedom of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit in the above is expanded.

Here, a light emitting mode for each game state of the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting mode according to a game state of the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit according to the sixth embodiment.

The game board light emitting unit is in the normal state light emitting mode when the gaming state is in the normal state, and is in the big hit state light emitting mode when the game state is in the big hit state, regardless of whether or not an abnormality has occurred. The main body frame light emitting unit is in the normal state light emitting mode when the gaming state is in the normal state, and is in the big hit state light emitting mode when the gaming state is in the big hit state, when there is no abnormality occurrence.

On the other hand, the main body frame light emitting unit is an abnormality notification mode when the gaming state is a normal state, and a special abnormality notification mode when the gaming state is a big hit state when an abnormality occurs. As a result, the game machine 10 changes the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit according to the game state, thereby alerting the player by the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit, which is a control of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit. Can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the game state in which the light emitting unit of the main body frame differs in the abnormality notification mode is set to the normal state and the big hit state, but in two different game states (first game state and second game state). The light emitting unit of the main body frame may have a different abnormality notification mode. Further, the abnormality notification mode in which the light emitting unit of the main body frame is different is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

[Fluctuating decoration setting process]
Next, a changing decoration setting process for setting a decoration pattern on the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion during the fluctuation of the special figure game, which is one of the normal states, will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the changing decoration setting process in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The changing decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D88 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129 or FIG. 152.

[Step D151] The control unit determines whether or not an error has occurred (abnormality has occurred) in the game machine 10. The control unit proceeds to step D152 when there is no error in the game machine 10, and proceeds to step D153 when there is an error in the game machine 10.

When the game control device 100 detects the occurrence and end of an error, it notifies the control unit (effect control device 300) by an error notification system command. As a result, the effect control device 300 can detect the occurrence and termination of an error in the game machine 10. The errors that can be detected by the control unit are, for example, front frame opening error, game frame opening error, shoot ball out error, overflow error, payout error error, switch error error, big winning opening illegal winning error, remaining ball error, magnetic error, There are vibration error, illegal winning error of Fuden, board radio wave error, frame radio wave error, and other errors. The control unit does not need to set all the errors to be determined in step D151 as the errors notified by the game control device 100, and may limit the errors to some errors.

The error notification system command is one of the single-shot system commands, and is processed by the single-shot system command processing (see FIG. 127) in step D62 of the received command analysis processing.
[Step D152] Since the error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has not occurred, the control unit sets the changing decorative pattern in the main body frame light emitting unit.

[Step D153] Since an error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has occurred, the control unit sets an error notification pattern in the main body frame light emitting unit.
[Step D154] The control unit sets a changing decorative pattern on the light emitting unit of the game board regardless of the presence or absence of an error. The control unit ends the changing decoration setting process after setting the changing decoration pattern in the light emitting unit of the game board.

[Decoration setting process during round]
Next, a decoration setting process during the round for setting a decoration pattern on the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the decoration setting process during the round in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129.

[Step D161] The control unit determines whether or not an error has occurred (abnormality has occurred) in the game machine 10. The control unit proceeds to step D162 when there is no error in the game machine 10, and proceeds to step D163 when there is an error in the game machine 10. The control unit does not need to set all the errors to be determined in step D161 for determining whether or not an error has occurred as all the errors notified by the game control device 100, and may limit the errors to some errors.

[Step D162] Since the error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has not occurred, the control unit sets the decoration pattern during the round in the main body frame light emitting unit.
[Step D163] Since an error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has occurred, the control unit sets an error notification pattern during the round in the main body frame light emitting unit. The error notification pattern during the round is different from the error notification pattern set by the control unit in the main body frame light emitting unit in step D153 of the changing decoration setting process.

[Step D164] The control unit sets a decorative pattern during the round in the game board light emitting unit regardless of whether or not an error has occurred. The control unit ends the decoration setting process during the round after setting the decoration pattern during the round on the light emitting unit of the game board.

In this way, when an error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has occurred, the control unit controls the main body frame light emitting unit with a decoration (error notification) pattern according to the game state. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it easy to distinguish between the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification and the light emitting mode of the game effect regardless of the game state, and it is possible to achieve both the game effect and the abnormality notification.

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. In the game machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the push button light emitting unit 25L performs an abnormality notification in place of the decorative light emitting device 18 (outer edge light emitting group 18L) in a specific gaming state (during a big hit). , Different from the sixth embodiment.

First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment and the light emitting mode at the time of abnormality (normal state and jackpot state) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a decorative portion of the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment and a light emitting mode in an abnormal state (normal state and jackpot state). The game machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode in an abnormal time (normal state), and the game machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode in an abnormal time (big hit state).

The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) has a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicating that the light emitting portion of the game board is in a light emitting mode according to the normal state in an abnormal state in the normal state. Further, in the game machine 10 shown in (1), the hatching pattern (crossing diagonal lines) indicates that the decorative light emitting device 18 (outer edge light emitting group 18L) and the handle light emitting unit 24L of the main body frame light emitting unit each have a light emitting mode corresponding to abnormalities. ).

The gaming machine 10 shown in (2) has a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicating that the game board light emitting unit and the decorative light emitting device 18 (outer edge light emitting group 18L) are in a light emitting mode according to the big hit state in an abnormal state (big hit state). ). Further, in the game machine 10 shown in (2), a hatching pattern (intersection diagonal line) indicates that the push button light emitting unit 25L of the main body frame light emitting unit has a light emitting mode corresponding to an abnormality.

Further, in the game machine 10 shown in (2), a clockwise arrow indicates that the light emitting mode of the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the light emitting mode of the inner edge light emitting group 40L are each clockwise rainbow color display. Therefore, the game machine 10 can perform the game effect during the big hit in cooperation with the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit even at the time of abnormality.

As described above, in the normal state, the game machine 10 notifies the abnormality by the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the handle light emitting unit 24L, and in the big hit state, the push button light emitting unit 25L notifies the abnormality. That is, the game machine 10 notifies the abnormality from the light emitting unit of the main body frame according to the game state. As a result, the game machine 10 can effectively notify the abnormality for each game state. Further, since the game machine 10 can perform effective abnormality notification for each game state, even in the case of an abnormality, the game board light emitting unit and the remaining main body frame light emitting unit can perform a coordinated game production. Can be done. Therefore, the game machine 10 can achieve both the game effect and the abnormality notification.

Further, the game machine 10 notifies the abnormality by the push button light emitting unit 25L in the big hit state, so that the abnormality notification does not interfere with the game effect performed by the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L. Further, since the push button light emitting unit 25L is located at the upper edge of the upper plate 21 and is close to the upper plate ball outlet 22, it is easy for the player who confirms the prize ball during the big hit to confirm the abnormality notification. .. Further, the abnormality notification by the push button light emitting unit 25L can be expected to have a check effect on the player who commits fraudulent acts.

Here, the light emitting modes of the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the push button light emitting unit 25L, the handle light emitting unit 24L, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting mode according to a game state of the outer edge light emitting group, the push button light emitting unit, the handle light emitting unit, and the inner edge light emitting group of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment.

The inner edge light emitting group 40L is a game board light emitting unit, and is a normal state light emitting mode when the game state is a normal state, and a big hit state light emitting mode when the game state is a big hit state, regardless of the presence or absence of an abnormality. Is.

The outer edge light emitting group 18L, the push button light emitting unit 25L, and the handle light emitting unit 24L are main body frame light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is a normal state light emitting mode when the gaming state is a normal state, and a big hit state light emitting mode when the gaming state is a big hit state, when there is no abnormality occurrence. On the other hand, the outer edge light emitting group 18L is an abnormality notification mode when the gaming state is a normal state and a jackpot state light emitting mode when the gaming state is a big hit state when an abnormality occurs. As described above, the outer edge light emitting group 18L is in charge of the abnormality notification in the normal state, and is not in charge of the abnormality notification in the jackpot state.

Further, the push button light emitting unit 25L is not set to a specific light emitting mode when there is no abnormality or when the game state is the normal state even if the abnormality occurs. As a result, the push button light emitting unit 25L can be in charge of the game effect by the event trigger, such as the game effect during the variable display and the setting operation during the customer waiting demonstration in the state. On the other hand, the push button light emitting unit 25L is an abnormality notification mode when an abnormality occurs when the gaming state is a big hit state. As described above, the push button light emitting unit 25L is not in charge of the abnormality notification in the normal state, but is in charge of the abnormality notification in the jackpot state.

Further, the handle light emitting unit 24L is an abnormality notification mode when an abnormality occurs when the gaming state is a normal state. On the other hand, the handle light emitting unit 24L is not set to a specific light emitting mode when there is no abnormality or when the game state is a big hit state even if an abnormality occurs. As a result, the steering wheel light emitting unit 24L can limit the light emitting opportunity and emphasize the abnormality notification mode. As described above, the handle light emitting unit 24L is in charge of the abnormality notification in the normal state, and is not in charge of the abnormality notification in the jackpot state.

As a result, the game machine 10 can change the main body frame light emitting unit in charge of abnormality notification according to the game state at the time of abnormality occurrence. Therefore, the game machine 10 can perform an abnormality notification having a high attention-calling power regardless of the game production for each game state. In such a game machine 10, it is possible to easily distinguish between the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification and the light emitting mode of the game effect, and it is possible to achieve both the game effect and the abnormality notification.

The combination of the light emitting unit for performing the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification (abnormality notification mode) and the light emitting mode of the game effect (game effect mode) is not limited to the combination of the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit, and is not limited to any other combination. It may be a combination of light emitting parts of.

[Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. The game machine 10 of the second modification of the sixth embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment in that the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit can be changed according to the game model.

Here, a light emitting mode for each game state of the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of a game machine-specific light emitting mode of the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit of the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The game board light emitting unit is a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model regardless of the presence or absence of an abnormality. For example, the light emitting mode of the game model A is the light emitting mode A regardless of the presence or absence of an abnormality, and the light emitting mode of the game model B is the light emitting mode B regardless of the presence or absence of an abnormality.

On the other hand, the main body frame light emitting unit has a common light emitting mode regardless of the game model when there is no abnormality, and is an abnormality notification mode corresponding to the game model when an abnormality occurs. For example, the abnormality notification mode of the game model A is the abnormality notification mode A, and the abnormality notification mode of the game model B is the abnormality notification mode B.

As a result, the game machine 10 makes the abnormality notification mode of the main body frame light emitting unit different depending on the game model, so that the abnormality notification of the main body frame light emitting unit becomes a control of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit depending on the game model. It is possible to improve the alerting power depending on the mode.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the game machine 10 may have an abnormality notification mode common to all game models in a normal game state, and may have an abnormality notification mode corresponding to the game model in a specific game state such as during a big hit. Such a game machine 10 gives priority to the degree of freedom of the light emitting mode for each game model during the jackpot that maximizes the effect of the game effect, and prioritizes the ease of understanding by the common abnormality notification mode in the remaining game states. can do.

[Decoration setting process during round]
Next, a decoration setting process during the round for setting a decoration pattern on the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the decoration setting process during the round in the effect control device of the second modification of the sixth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129.

[Step D171] The control unit determines whether or not an error has occurred (abnormality has occurred) in the game machine 10. The control unit proceeds to step D172 when there is no error in the game machine 10, and proceeds to step D173 when there is an error in the game machine 10. The control unit does not need to set all the errors to be determined in step D171 for determining whether or not an error has occurred as all the errors notified by the game control device 100, and may limit the errors to some errors.

[Step D172] Since the error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has not occurred, the control unit sets the decoration pattern during the round in the main body frame light emitting unit.
[Step D173] The control unit determines the game model in the game machine 10 and branches according to the game model.

The game control device 100 notifies the control unit (effect control device 300) of the game model by a power-on command or a power failure recovery command. As a result, the effect control device 300 can detect the game model in the game machine 10. It should be noted that the control unit does not necessarily need to determine the game model that specifies the specific game model, and may specify the model classification for classifying the abnormality notification mode.

The power-on command and the power failure recovery command are one of the single-shot commands, and are processed by the single-shot command processing (see FIG. 127) in step D62 of the receiving command analysis processing.

[Step D174] Since the determination result of the game model is the game model A, the control unit sets the error notification pattern A (abnormality notification mode A) during the round in the light emitting unit of the main body frame.
[Step D175] Since the determination result of the game model is the game model B, the control unit sets the error notification pattern B (abnormality notification mode B) during the round in the light emitting unit of the main body frame.

[Step D176] The control unit sets a decorative pattern during the round on the light emitting unit of the game board regardless of the presence or absence of an error. The control unit ends the decoration setting process during the round after setting the decoration pattern during the round on the light emitting unit of the game board.

In this way, when an error that the main body frame light emitting unit targets for notification has occurred, the control unit controls the main body frame light emitting unit with a decoration (error notification) pattern according to the game model. As a result, the game machine 10 can easily distinguish between the light emitting mode of the abnormality notification and the light emitting mode of the game effect according to the game model, and can achieve both the game effect and the abnormality notification.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the first and second modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a main body frame light emitting unit (outer edge light emitting group 18L, push button light emitting unit 25L, handle light emitting unit 24L, etc.), a game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a control unit (game control device). 100, effect control device 300), and the like. The main body frame light emitting units are provided in the main body frame (front frame 12) by arranging a plurality of light emitting units in a row. The game board light emitting unit is provided on a game board (game board 30) in which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged in a row parallel to the main body frame light emitting unit and are detachably attached to the main body frame. In the first moving light emitting mode (for example, clockwise rainbow color display), the control unit moves the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit in the same direction when no abnormality is detected. A second moving light emitting mode (for example, the game board light emitting unit displays a clockwise rainbow color) in which the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit move in different directions when controlled and an abnormality is detected. , The light emitting part of the main body frame is controlled by counterclockwise rainbow color display).

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) includes a main body frame light emitting unit, and a transparent member holding frame rotatably attached to the main body frame.
(3) The control unit switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the main body frame light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.

(4) The control unit switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the game board light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.
(5) The game machine 10 includes a main body frame light emitting unit (outer edge light emitting group 18L, push button light emitting unit 25L, handle light emitting unit 24L, etc.), a game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a control unit (game control device). 100, effect control device 300), and the like. The main body frame light emitting unit is provided on the main body frame (front frame 12) by arranging a plurality of light emitting units in an annular shape. The game board light emitting unit is provided on a game board (game board 30) in which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged in an annular shape independent of the main body frame light emitting unit and are detachably attached to the main body frame. In the first moving light emitting mode (for example, clockwise rainbow color display), the control unit moves the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit in the same direction when no abnormality is detected. A second moving light emitting mode (for example, the game board light emitting unit displays a clockwise rainbow color) in which the main body frame light emitting unit and the game board light emitting unit move in different directions when controlled and an abnormality is detected. , The light emitting part of the main body frame is controlled by counterclockwise rainbow color display).

(6) The game machine 10 of (5) includes a transparent member holding frame rotatably attached to the main body frame, and the transparent member holding frame includes a main body frame light emitting unit.
(7) The game machine 10 of (5) is provided with an operation unit capable of accepting the operation of the player in the main body frame, and the operation unit is provided with a main body frame light emitting unit.

(8) The operation unit of (7) is an operation unit (operation unit 24) of the ball striking device.
(9) The operation unit of (7) is an option setting unit (option setting unit 25) that accepts setting operations of various options.

(10) The control unit of (5) switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the main body frame light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.
(11) The control unit of (5) switches the moving direction of the predetermined light emitting mode in the game board light emitting unit between the first moving light emitting mode and the second moving light emitting mode.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modified example 1 and the modified example 2) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a main body frame light emitting unit (outer edge light emitting group 18L, push button light emitting unit 25L, handle light emitting unit 24L, etc.) and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The main body frame light emitting unit is provided in the main body frame (front frame 12). When the control unit detects an abnormality in the first gaming state (for example, the normal state), the control unit controls the main body frame light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode (abnormality notification mode), and the second game state is different from the first gaming state. When an abnormality is detected in the gaming state (big hit state), the main body frame light emitting unit is controlled in a second light emitting mode (special abnormality notification mode) different from the first light emitting mode.

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) has a game board (game board 30) having a game board light emitting part (inner edge light emitting group 40L) and a main body frame light emitting part, which are detachably attached to the main body frame. A transparent member holding frame that is rotatably attached to the main body frame is provided.

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (2) has the same light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit regardless of the presence or absence of abnormality detection in the second gaming state.
(4) The control unit of (1) controls the outer edge light emitting group 18L in the second light emitting mode in the second gaming state.

(5) The control unit of (1) controls the outer edge light emitting group 18L in the first light emitting mode in the first gaming state, and the push button light emitting unit 25L or the handle light emitting unit 24L in the second gaming state. It is controlled by the light emission mode of.

(6) The game machine 10 includes a main body frame light emitting unit, a game board light emitting unit, and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The main body frame light emitting unit (outer edge light emitting group 18L, push button light emitting unit 25L, handle light emitting unit 24L, etc.) is provided in the main body frame (front frame 12). The game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L) is provided on the game board (game board 30) that is detachably attached to the main body frame. When the game board is of the first type (game model, game machine type, etc.), the control unit controls the light emitting mode of the main body frame light emitting unit at the time of abnormality detection by the first light emitting mode, and the game board is the first. In the case of the second type different from the first type, the light emitting mode of the main body frame light emitting unit at the time of abnormality detection is controlled by the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode.

(7) When an abnormality is detected in the first gaming state (normal state), the control unit of (6) determines the light emitting mode of the main body frame light emitting unit when the game board is the first type and when the game board is the second type. The light emitting mode is common to the case of the type, and when an abnormality is detected in the second gaming state (big hit state), the light emitting mode of the main body frame light emitting portion when the game board is the first type is the first light emitting mode. The light emitting mode of the main body frame light emitting unit when the game board is of the second type is defined as the second light emitting mode.

(8) The gaming machine 10 of (7) has a common light emitting mode of the game board light emitting unit regardless of the presence or absence of abnormality detection in the second gaming state.
[7th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167. The game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment can guide the player to the aim of the game ball by the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit provided on the game board 30 in a predetermined game state. First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the light emitting mode in a normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a decorative portion and a light emitting mode in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. The game machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode in a normal time (before a power failure occurs), and the game machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode in a power failure recovery time.

First, the configuration of the decorative portion (light emitting portion) of the game machine 10 will be described. The game machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The light emitting portion provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is a form of the main body frame light emitting portion. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L composed of a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is a form of the row light emitting group.

These main body frame light emitting units perform a game effect in a common light emitting mode in a plurality of game models, and also perform an abnormality notification in a common light emitting mode in a plurality of game models.
The game machine 10 has a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L, a gate light emitting unit 34L, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Prepare for 30. The light emitting unit provided in the game board 30 is a form of the game board light emitting unit. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is a form of the row light emitting group.

The gate light emitting unit 34L decorates the normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 according to a predetermined light emission mode. The start winning opening light emitting unit 36L decorates the starting winning opening 36 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The ordinary variable winning device light emitting unit 37L decorates the ordinary variable winning device 37 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L decorates the special variable winning device 38 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The game board light emitting unit performs a game production in a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model.

The game machine 10 guides the player to the aim of the game ball in a predetermined game state. The game machine 10 shown in (1) is in a special time reduction (during normal electric support), and guides the player by the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit so that the aim of the game ball is the normal variable winning device 37. There is.

The game machine 10 emits light from the light emitting unit 37L of the normally variable winning device in a guide mode (for example, lighting white or blinking white at a cycle of 100 ms), and turns off the other light emitting units of the game board. Further, the game machine 10 turns off the light emitting unit of the main body frame. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (1), a hatching pattern (crossing diagonal line) indicates that the light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device emits light in a guide mode, and the remaining light emitting unit is displayed in white. Indicated by.

Such a game machine 10 can guide the player to the ordinary variable winning device 37 as the aim of the game ball. As a result, the game machine 10 can appropriately draw the target of the game ball to the player, so that the game guidance effect is high for the unguided player.

In addition, the game machine 10 guides the player as the aim of the game ball from the general figure start gate 34, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38, which are candidates for guidance. One target (guidance target unit) can be selected according to the gaming state. Further, although the game machine 10 is supposed to select one guide target unit from the guide target candidates according to the game state, two or more may be selected. Further, the guidance target portion is not limited to the range illustrated above, and required gates, winning openings, etc. can be set according to the model of the game machine 10.

For convenience of explanation, the light emitting unit corresponding to the guide target unit is referred to as a guide light emitting unit, and the light emitting unit that is a control with respect to the guide light emitting unit is referred to as a control light emitting unit. The range of the control light emitting unit may be a light emitting unit for all decorations except the guide light emitting unit, or a light emitting unit having a predetermined relationship with the guide light emitting unit (for example, a positional relationship located in the vicinity of the guide light emitting unit). It may be limited to a part. In this case, the game machine 10 sets a control light emitting unit for each guide light emitting unit.

Further, in the case of recovery from a power failure when the power is cut off while guiding the player to the aim of the game ball, the game machine 10 emits light in the guidance mode for the guidance light emitting unit as shown in (2), and emits light from the rest. The unit emits light in the mode of the game state at the time of restoration according to the game state at the time of restoration. The game state mode at the time of restoration is a light emitting mode set in advance for each game state. For example, the normal state (during symbol change) is blinked in red, and the normal state (during symbol stop) is blinked in green. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (2), a hatching pattern (crossing diagonal line) indicates that the light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device emits light in a guide mode, and the remaining light emitting unit is in the game state mode at the time of restoration. Is indicated by a hatch pattern (parallel diagonal lines).

Such a game machine 10 can guide a player to a normal variable winning device 37 as a target of a game ball even when recovering from a power failure. Further, the game machine 10 can guide the player to the game state in a state where the display content on the display device 41 is not necessarily restored due to the recovery from the power failure from the power cutoff.

The gaming machine 10 has a light emitting mode in which the guiding effect to the player is lower than that before the power failure, but the gaming state is guided together with the aim of the gaming ball to support the player's resumption of the game. The game machine 10 can improve the game guidance effect for a player who forgets the state before the power failure due to the power failure time.

Next, the display state of the game machine 10 before and after the power failure will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a display state before and after a power failure of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The power supply of the game machine 10 is stopped due to a power failure at the timing T10, the power supply is not performed between the timing T10 and the timing T11, and the power supply is restarted at the timing T11.

The gaming machine 10 is in the gaming state before the occurrence of a power failure (before the timing T10) during the general electric support. The game machine 10 turns on the guide light emitting unit (normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L) and turns off the control light emitting unit (light emitting unit other than the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L). Further, the game machine 10 displays on the display device 41 in an effect mode corresponding to the game state during the normal electric support (see FIG. 164 (1)).

When the power supply is restarted at the timing T11 after the power supply is stopped at the timing T10, the game machine 10 executes the initialization process by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300, respectively. Since the backup power supply unit 420 holds the data of the RAM 111C inside the game microcomputer 111 during the power loss, the game control device 100 returns to the game state when the power is cut off. The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 restores the effect control in response to the power failure recovery command. However, since the effect control device 300 has lost the information regarding the effect before the power failure, the effect before the power failure cannot be continuously restored.

The effect control device 300 identifies that the game state is in the normal power support based on the power failure recovery command, turns on the guide light emitting unit, and turns off the control light emitting unit. Further, the effect control device 300 displays an initialization display mode (for example, a message such as "Please wait for a while") on the display device 41. The power failure recovery command includes information that can identify the game state. For example, the power failure recovery command contains information that can identify the presence or absence of probability fluctuations and the presence or absence of general electric support.

As a result, the game machine 10 can promptly guide the target of the game ball even after the power failure is restored. Since the effect control device 300 requires time for the initialization process (for example, development of image data) executed by the VDP 312, the display device 41 is in a gaming state until the VDP 312 completes the initialization process. The display corresponding to is not possible.

When the VDP 312 finishes the initialization process at the timing T13, the effect control device 300 displays a recovery display mode (for example, a message such as "Please wait for a while" or "Waiting for command reception") on the display device 41. The effect control device 300 continues to light the guide light emitting unit, and emits light from the control light emitting unit in the light emitting mode at the time of restoration. The light emitting mode at the time of restoration is a display corresponding to the gaming state at the time of restoration, and is set in advance. The effect control device 300 blinks the control light emitting unit in a predetermined color as the light emitting mode at the time of restoration, for example, when the gaming state is in the normal electric support.

As a result, the game machine 10 can promptly guide the target of the game ball even after the power failure is restored. It should be noted that the effect control device 300 may not be able to perform the effect in the effect mode according to the game state until the command is received from the game control device 100 following the power failure recovery command. However, if there is no update of the game state, the game control device 100 does not necessarily transmit the command following the power failure recovery command. Even in such a case, the game machine 10 can make the control light emitting unit emit light in the recovery light emitting mode based on the power failure recovery command (see FIG. 164 (2)).

As a result, the game machine 10 can support the player to resume the game by guiding the game state together with the aim of the game ball. Therefore, the game machine 10 can improve the game guidance effect for the player who forgets the state before the power failure due to the power failure time.

When the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 at the timing T14, the game machine 10 can perform an effect according to the game state. For example, the game machine 10 turns on the guide light emitting unit and turns off the control light emitting unit. In addition, the game machine 10 displays on the display device 41 in an effect mode corresponding to the game state during the normal electric support.

Although the control light emitting unit is turned off from the timing T12 to the timing T13, the game machine 10 may emit light from the timing T13 in the same manner as the timing T14 at the time of restoration.

Next, the mode of light emission at the time of restoration for each game state will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting mode according to a game state of the specific light emitting unit and the non-specific light emitting unit of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 has a game state "low probability state (without Fuden support)" and a game state "low probability state (with Fuden support)" based on the information included in the power failure recovery command that can identify the game state. , The game state "high probability state (without power failure support)" and the game state "high probability state (with power failure support)" can be discriminated.

In the game state "low probability state (with normal electric support)" and the game state "high probability state (with general electric support)", the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L that decorates the normal variable winning device 37 is used as a guide light emitting unit. The remaining light emitting part is used as a control light emitting part. In the game state "high probability state (without general electric support)", the start winning port light emitting unit 36L that decorates the starting winning port 36 is used as a guide light emitting unit, and the remaining light emitting unit is used as a control light emitting unit.

The game state "low probability state (with Fuden support)", the game state "high probability state (without Fuden support)", and the game state "high probability state (with Fuden support)" guide the aim of the game ball. As a guide light emitting mode, the guide light emitting unit is turned on and the control light emitting unit is turned off.

In the game state "low probability state (with normal electric support)", the guide light emitting unit is turned on and the control light emitting unit is blinked at high speed (for example, blinking at a cycle of 200 ms) as a light emitting mode at the time of restoration. In the game state "high probability state (without Fukuden support)", the guide light emitting part is turned on and the control light emitting part is turned on at low speed alternately (for example, 500 ms in two systems with different lighting and extinguishing timings) as a light emitting mode at the time of restoration. (Blinking cycle). In the game state "high probability state (with normal electric support)", the guide light emitting part is turned on and the control light emitting part is turned on at high speed alternately (for example, 200 ms in two systems with different lighting and extinguishing timings) as a light emitting mode at the time of restoration. (Blinking cycle).

As a result, after the power failure is restored, the game machine 10 can guide the game state together with the aim of the game ball and support the player to resume the game. The game machine 10 does not necessarily guide the aim of the game ball in all the game states. For example, the game machine 10 does not guide the aim of the game ball in the game state "low probability state (without Fuden support)". ..

Further, the game machine 10 may guide the aim of the game ball based on a game state other than the illustrated game state. For example, when the game machine 10 sets the passage of the game ball at a predetermined gate as one of the jackpot start conditions (game state transition conditions), the game machine 10 waits for the game ball to pass through the predetermined gate as the aim of the game ball. It can be in a game state to guide. At this time, the game control device 100 can include information that can identify the game state in the power failure recovery command.

[Power failure recovery decoration setting process]
Next, the power failure recovery decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a power failure recovery decoration setting process in the effect control device of the seventh embodiment. The power failure recovery decoration setting process of the seventh embodiment is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300) instead of the process executed in step D85 of the decoration setting process (FIG. 129). is there.

[Step D181] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state is a guided gaming state. The guide-required game state is a game state that guides the aim of the game ball, and is, for example, the game state shown in FIG. 166. The control unit proceeds to step D182 when the gaming state is the guided gaming state, and proceeds to step D185 when the gaming state is not the guided gaming state.

[Step D182] The control unit determines whether or not the initialization of the VDP 312 is completed. The control unit proceeds to step D183 when the initialization of VDP 312 is not completed, and proceeds to step D184 when the initialization of VDP 312 is completed.

[Step D183] The control unit sets the guide light emitting unit to turn on, sets the control light emitting unit to turn off, and ends the power failure recovery decoration setting process.
[Step D184] The control unit sets the guidance light emitting unit to the lighting setting, sets the non-specific light emitting unit to the recovery light emitting mode setting, and ends the power failure recovery decoration setting process.

[Step D185] The control unit sets the power failure recovery decoration pattern for the light emitting unit, and ends the power failure recovery decoration setting process.
The decoration pattern set in this way continues until the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 that can restore the effect content to normal. As a result, if the gaming state before the power failure is the guidance-requiring game state, the game machine 10 can continue the game guidance from the time when the power failure is restored. Further, the game machine 10 can guide the player and the game hall staff to the game state before the power failure by setting the decoration pattern according to the game state before the power failure.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a game board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 has a first light emitting unit (for example, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L) and a second light emitting unit (for example, an outer edge light emitting group 18L and an inner edge light emitting group 40L). The control unit has a first light emitting unit as a first light emitting mode (guided light emitting mode: lighting), and a second light emitting unit as a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode (guided light emitting mode: extinguished). When a power failure occurs in the first light emitting control state (guided light emitting mode control state), the first light emitting unit is set to the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting unit is set to a second light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode after the power failure is restored. Control is performed in the second light emission control state (light emission mode control state at the time of restoration) which is the light emission mode of 3 (light emission mode at the time of restoration).

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) has a game board (game board 30) that is detachably attached to a main body frame (front frame 12) and has a game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a main body. It has a frame light emitting portion (outer edge light emitting group 18L), and includes a transparent member holding frame that is rotatably pivotally attached to the main body frame.

(3) The game machine 10 has a guide target unit (for example, a normal variable winning device 37), a first light emitting unit (for example, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L), and a second light emitting unit (for example, an outer edge light emitting unit). The group 18L, the inner edge light emitting group 40L) and the control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) are included. The guidance target part is the target of the game guidance. The first light emitting unit is arranged at a position corresponding to the guide target unit. The second light emitting unit is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the guide target unit. The control unit sets the first light emitting unit as the first light emitting mode (guided light emitting mode: lighting) for guiding the guide target unit, and turns off the second light emitting unit in the first light emitting control state (guided light emitting mode control). In the case of a power failure (state), after the power failure is restored, the first light emitting unit is set as the first light emitting mode, and the second light emitting unit is set as the second light emitting mode according to the gaming state at the time of power failure recovery (recovery light emitting mode). It is controlled in the second light emission control state (light emission mode control state at the time of restoration).

(4) The game machine 10 of (3) selects a guide target unit from two or more guide target candidates according to the game state.
(5) In the game machine 10 of (4), the command transmitted by the game control device to the effect control device at the time of power failure recovery includes the game state at the time of power failure recovery, and the effect control device includes the game at the time of power failure recovery included in the command. Select the guidance target part based on the state.

(6) The gaming state at the time of power failure recovery in (5) includes a state with a probability fluctuation or a state without a probability fluctuation.
(7) The gaming state at the time of recovery from the power failure in (5) includes a state with or without power support.

(8) The gaming state at the time of power failure recovery in (5) includes a state of waiting for the establishment of the gaming state transition condition.
[Modification 1 of the 7th embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment turns off the light emitting unit during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 at the time of recovery from a power failure. First, the initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board of the game machine 10 of the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169. FIG. 168 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board of the first modification of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the initialization operation of the board effect device in the game board of the first modification of the seventh embodiment.

The board effect device 44 (44a, 44b, 44c) performs a series of initialization operations in the order shown in (1) to (5) when the power failure is restored. The initialization operation is an operation for confirming whether the board effect device 44 operates normally. For example, the game machine 10 (effect control device 300) monitors the effect switch 47 provided for each board effect device 44 to perform the initialization operation of the board effect device 44. The effect accessory switch 47 is, for example, an effect motor switch that detects the initial position of the effect motor that drives the board effect device 44, and the on / off state is monitored by the board effect device 44.

The game board 30 shown in (1) shows the state of the board effect device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L at the start of the initialization operation. At this time, the board effect device 44 (44a, 44b, 44c) is still in the initial position. That is, the board effect device 44 is in a position that does not interfere with the display area of the display device 41. The fact that the board effect device 44 does not interfere with the display area of the display device 41 means that the board effect device 44 does not interfere with the visibility of the display contents on the display device 41. Further, the inner edge light emitting group 40L is turned off (indicated by a white display that the light emitting portion is turned off). The game board 30 shown in (1) is supposed to turn off the inner edge light emitting group 40L, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board light emitting unit and the main body frame light emitting unit may be turned off.

The game board 30 shown in (2) shows the state of the board effect device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the start of the initialization operation and after the game board 30 shown in (1). .. At this time, among the board effect devices 44, the board effect device 44a operates up to the board effect intermediate position, and the board effect devices 44b and 44c are still in the initial positions. That is, the board effect device 44a is in a position where it can interfere with the display area of the display device 41. However, when the display content displayed by the display device 41 is the initialization display mode, the board effect device 44a is not necessarily the display device 41 because it is a provisional display content until the initialization display mode returns to normal. It does not interfere with the visibility of the displayed contents.

The game board 30 shown in (3) shows the state of the board effect device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the start of the initialization operation and after the game board 30 shown in (2). .. At this time, among the board effect devices 44, the board effect devices 44b and 44c operate up to the board effect middle position, and all of the board effect devices 44 are in the board effect middle position. That is, the board effect devices 44a, 44b, 44c are located at positions where they can interfere with the display area of the display device 41. Further, the inner edge light emitting group 40L is turned off.

The game board 30 shown in (4) shows the state of the board effect device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the start of the initialization operation and after the game board 30 shown in (3). .. At this time, among the board effect devices 44, the board effect devices 44b and 44c operate from the board effect middle position to the initial position, and only the board effect device 44a is in the board effect middle position. That is, the board effect device 44a is in a position where it can interfere with the display area of the display device 41. Further, the inner edge light emitting group 40L is turned off.

The game board 30 shown in (5) shows the state of the board effect device 44, the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L after the start of the initialization operation and after the game board 30 shown in (4). .. At this time, the board effect device 44a operates from the middle position of the board effect to the initial position, and all of the board effect devices 44 are set to the initial positions to end the initialization operation. That is, the board effect device 44 is in a position where it cannot interfere with the display area of the display device 41. When the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 is completed, the inner edge light emitting group 40L ends the extinguishing and becomes a required lighting mode (a hatching pattern (crossing diagonal line) indicates that the light emitting unit is a required lighting mode).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 indicates to the player that the gaming state is not normal by turning off the inner edge light emitting group 40L during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44. That is, the game machine 10 can clearly distinguish between the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored and the operation in the game effect. As a result, the game machine 10 can reduce the possibility of giving the player a misunderstanding in the progress of the game, and can check the start of the game by the player during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored. That is, the game machine 10 has a game start check function during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored.

Next, the display of the display device 41 during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a display example of a display device in which the board effect device in the game board of the first modification of the seventh embodiment is in the initialization operation.

The game board 30 shows that the board effect device 44 is being initialized after the power failure is restored, and the display device 41 is displaying the symbol variation due to the winning of the starting winning opening 36. The board effect device 44a is located at a board effect intermediate position (see FIG. 168 (2) or FIG. 169 (4)) that may interfere with the display area of the display device 41, and interferes with the display area of the display device 41 to visually recognize the symbol variation. The sex is impaired. Under normal conditions, the display device 41 interferes with the display area of the display device 41 by displaying in coordination with the operation of the board effect device 44 even if the board effect device 44 operates. There is no problem. However, the symbol fluctuation during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored may impair the visibility of the player because the operation is not coordinated with the operation of the board effect device 44 (non-coordinated operation). ..

The game machine 10 suppresses the occurrence opportunity of the non-cooperative operation by the above-mentioned game start check function, and prevents the player from giving an unexpected disadvantage. The game machine 10 executes the symbol variation display on the display device 41 even during the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored, and the result of the variation display game is directly in the interest of the player. Because it is related to the target, it aims at a higher degree of profit protection.

Next, the display state of the game machine 10 after the power failure is restored will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a display state of the gaming machine of the modified example 1 of the seventh embodiment after the power failure is restored.

The power supply of the game machine 10 is restarted at the timing T20 from the power failure state in which the power supply is stopped. The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 each execute the initialization process after the power supply is restarted. The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300. At the timing T21, the effect control device 300 receives the power failure recovery command and restores the effect control.

The effect control device 300 starts the initialization operation of the board effect device 44, turns off the light emitting unit, and sets the display of the display device 41 to the initialization display mode (for example, a message such as "Please wait for a while"). As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored by turning off the light emitting unit.

Further, for example, even if the display device 41 starts the symbol variation due to the winning of the start winning opening 36 at the timing T22, the effect control device 300 continues the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 and the extinguishing of the light emitting unit. .. As a result, the game machine 10 continues the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored even if the symbol change is started in the display device 41. Further, the game machine 10 continues to turn off the light emitting unit to clearly indicate the initialization operation of the board effect device 44.

Further, at the timing T23, when the initialization of the VDP 312 is completed, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the display device 41 as a restoration display mode (for example, a message such as "Please wait for a while" or "Waiting for command reception"). To do. The effect control device 300 continues the initialization operation until the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored, while setting the display of the display device 41 as the restoration display mode. Further, the game machine 10 continues to turn off the light emitting unit to clearly indicate the initialization operation of the board effect device 44.

When the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored at the timing T24, the game machine 10 switches the display mode of the light emitting unit to the light emitting mode at the time of restoration. As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the completion of the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored.

When the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 at the timing T25, the effect control device 300 controls the light emitting unit to emit light in a game state light emitting mode according to the game state, and displays the display device 41 in the game state display mode according to the game state. Display control.

[Power failure recovery decoration setting process]
Next, the power failure recovery decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a power failure recovery decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first modification of the seventh embodiment. The power failure recovery decoration setting process of the first modification of the seventh embodiment is executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300) instead of the process executed in step D85 of the decoration setting process (FIG. 129). It is a process to be performed.

[Step D191] The control unit determines whether or not the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 has been completed. The control unit proceeds to step D192 when the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 is completed, and proceeds to step D193 when the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 is not completed.

[Step D192] The control unit sets the light emitting unit to turn off and ends the power failure recovery decoration setting process.
[Step D193] The control unit sets the power failure recovery decoration pattern for the light emitting unit, and ends the power failure recovery decoration setting process.

The decoration pattern set in this way continues until the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 that can restore the effect content to normal. As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the initialization operation of the board effect device 44 after the power failure is restored.

The game machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a game board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 includes a light emitting unit (for example, an inner edge light emitting group 40L) and an effect device (board effect device 44). The effect device has a movable portion that can be converted into a first state (initial state) and a second state (during effect state). The control unit performs initialization control for setting the movable portion in the first state and the second state of the effect device. The control unit turns off the light emitting unit during the initialization control.

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) has a game board (game board 30) that is detachably attached to a main body frame (front frame 12) and has a game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a main body. It has a frame light emitting portion (outer edge light emitting group 18L), and includes a transparent member holding frame that is rotatably pivotally attached to the main body frame.

(3) The game machine 10 of (1) includes a display device (display device 41) on the game board 30. The movable portion greatly interferes with the display area of the display device in the second state as compared with the first state.
(4) The control unit of (1) displays on the display device according to the progress of the game during the initialization control.

(5) The game machine of (4) can execute the variable display game, and the control unit displays the symbol variation on the display device.
[8th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described. The game machine 10 of the eighth embodiment aims at both the game guidance and the effect display on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment switches the display mode of the light emitting unit according to the display content of the display device 41.

First, a light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during normal display by the display device 41 and a light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during special display by the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a decorative portion and a light emitting mode in the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment.

The game machine 10 shown in (1) shows the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during the normal display of the display device 41, and the game machine 10 shown in (2) shows the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during the special display of the display device 41. Shown.
First, the configuration of the decorative portion (light emitting portion) of the game machine 10 will be described. The game machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The light emitting unit provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is a form of the main body frame light emitting unit. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L composed of a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is a form of the row light emitting group.

The game machine 10 is provided with a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L and a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L in the game board 30. The light emitting unit provided in the game board 30 is a form of the game board light emitting unit. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is a form of the row light emitting group. The ordinary variable winning device light emitting unit 37L decorates the ordinary variable winning device 37 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The light emitting unit 37L of the ordinary variable winning device is located in the extension direction on one side of the inner edge light emitting group 40L.

Next, a light emitting mode of the light emitting unit during normal display by the display device 41 will be described. The normal display referred to here is a predetermined display state, for example, a display state during normal fluctuation (excluding predetermined reach fluctuation and advance notice operation) or when the symbol is stopped. The special display is a display state different from the predetermined normal display, for example, a predetermined reach fluctuation or a display state during the advance notice operation.

In the game machine 10 shown in (1), the hatching pattern (crossing diagonal lines) and the clockwise arrow indicate that the game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L) emits light in a clockwise rainbow color display during normal display. Indicated by. The light emitting mode of the clockwise rainbow color display is a light emitting mode that guides the aiming (right-handed) to the normal variable winning device 37.

In this way, the game machine 10 guides the player to right-handed by the clockwise movement display (including the circulation display) by the inner edge light emitting group 40L. At this time, the light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device that decorates the normal variable winning device 37 is located in the extension direction on one side of the inner edge light emitting group 40L, and thus becomes the end point of the clockwise rainbow color display. By arranging the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the ordinary variable winning device 37 to be guided, the game machine 10 improves the right-handed guidance effect to the player.

The light emitting unit 37L of the normal variable winning device may form a group of row-shaped light emitting groups together with the inner edge light emitting group 40L and display a clockwise rainbow color together with the inner edge light emitting group 40L, or may be a clockwise rainbow. A special display mode (for example, lighting in white) may be used as the end point of the color display. The light emitting unit that performs these game guidance can be regarded as a guidance light emitting unit. Further, the light emitting mode performed by the guide light emitting unit as a game guide can be regarded as a guide light emitting mode.

Further, the gaming machine 10 shown in (1) indicates that the frame decorative light emitting device 18 (outer edge light emitting group 18L) is in a light emitting mode of clockwise rainbow color display during normal display, in a hatching pattern (crossed diagonal line) and clockwise. It is indicated by the arrow of. The light emitting mode of the clockwise rainbow color display is a light emitting mode that guides the aiming (right-handed) to the normal variable winning device 37. At this time, of the outer edge light emitting group 18L, the outer edge light emitting unit 18L2 located below the normal variable winning device 37 is excluded from the target of the clockwise rainbow color display. The outer edge light emitting unit 18L2 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, blinking of 100 ms (indicated by a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines))) according to the game state, which can be distinguished from the clockwise rainbow color display. In the game machine 10, the light emitting unit that emits light in a light emitting mode according to the game state, which can be distinguished from the clockwise rainbow color display, is not limited to the outer edge light emitting unit 18L2, and for example, the light emitting unit located below the normal variable winning device 37. It may be all of the department. For example, the game machine 10 has a light emitting mode capable of distinguishing the start winning opening light emitting unit 36L that decorates the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L that decorates the special variable winning device 38, and the like from the clockwise rainbow color display. It emits light at. Further, the game machine 10 includes a light emitting unit located around the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, for example, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to be decorated, and a normal symbol starting gate (normal symbol start). The gate light emitting unit 34L or the like that decorates the gate) 34 may be turned off.

As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate that the aim is the normal variable winning device 37, as well as the right-handed guidance to the player. The game machine 10 can display the variable display game on the display device 41 during the right-handed guidance. However, if the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit is emphasized in the production of the entire game machine, the game machine 10 may relatively bury the display mode of the display device 41. Such a game machine may cause a decrease in the interest of the player.

Therefore, the game machine 10 interrupts the right-handed guidance according to the display content on the display device 41. That is, the game machine 10 has a guidance interruption function for interrupting right-handed guidance during a special display that is distinguished from the normal display. The gaming machine 10 shown in (2) is in special display (for example, during reach display) on the display device 41, and the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the outer edge light emitting group 18L are light emitting modes according to the game state. The gaming machine 10 shown in (2) has a hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicating that the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the outer edge light emitting group 18L are light emitting modes according to the gaming state.

In this way, the game machine 10 can make the player pay attention to the display content of the display device 41 during the special display by interrupting the right-handed guidance during the special display on the display device 41. Therefore, the gaming machine can reduce the chance of competition between the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit and the display mode of the display device 41, and can improve the interest of the player by producing the game according to the game state.

The game machine 10 can set the timing for special display in advance for each variable display pattern, and can distinguish the display content on the display device 41 into the normal display and the special display based on the setting content. Further, although the game machine 10 exemplifies right-handed as an example of game guidance, left-handed or other game guidance aiming at a position may be used. Further, although the game machine 10 exemplifies the normal variable winning device 37 as the target of the game guidance, it may be another part, for example, at the starting winning opening 36, the special variable winning device 38, the normal figure starting gate 34, or the like. There may be.

Further, when the game machine 10 sets the normal figure start gate 34 above the normal variation winning device 37 as the target of the right-handed guidance, the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the outer edge light emitting group 40L located below the normal figure start gate 34. The group 18L may be excluded from the target of the clockwise rainbow color display.

[Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. The game machine 10 of the first modification of the eighth embodiment makes it possible to switch the display content of the display device 41 from the normal display to the special display only when the game guidance is not performed in the light emitting unit.

The display state of the game machine 10 during the normal power support will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a display state of the game machine according to the eighth embodiment during the normal power support.

The game machine 10 is in the game state of being supported by Fuden. It should be noted that during the Fuden support, this is an example of a game state in which game guidance is provided. The game machine 10 switches the light emitting mode of the guidance light emitting unit (for example, the inner edge light emitting group 40L and the outer edge light emitting group 18L) that performs the game guidance at a predetermined cycle. For example, the game machine 10 switches the light emitting mode of the guide light emitting unit from the game effect light emitting mode to the guided light emitting mode at the timing T32, and switches from the guided light emitting mode to the game effect light emitting mode at the timing T33. That is, the game machine 10 emits light in a guided light emitting mode during the light emitting period TS11 from the timing T32 to the timing T33, and emits light in the game effect light emitting mode during the light emitting period TS12 from the timing T33 to the timing T34. The light emission pattern of is repeated. In this way, the game machine 10 secures an opportunity for game guidance to be performed during the cycle TS1 by juxtaposing the game guidance period for providing game guidance and the game production period for performing game production. As a result, the game machine 10 aims to achieve both game guidance and game production.

On the other hand, the game machine 10 limits the special display of the display device 41 during the period when the guide light emitting unit emits light in the guide light emitting mode, and permits the special display during the period when the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. There is. For example, the game machine 10 performs a special display on the display device 41 between the timing T30 and the timing T31 during the period until the timing T32 when the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. It should be noted that the game machine 10 does not necessarily perform special display on the display device 41 even during the period in which the guidance light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. Further, the game machine 10 performs a special display on the display device 41 when a special result is derived (for example, a big hit) even during a period in which the guide light emitting unit emits light in the guide light emitting mode. May be good. As a result, the game machine 10 suppresses the special display on the display device 41 from being buried in the game guide, and realizes a cooperative operation with the game effect light emitting mode in the guide light emitting unit.

Although the light emitting period TS11 and the light emitting period TS12 have been described as fixed periods, for example, they may be variable periods that cooperate with voice output such as BGM and voice. For example, when the game machine 10 switches from the voice pattern A to the voice pattern B at the timing T32, the output period of the voice pattern B can be set to the light emission period TS11. Then, when the game machine 10 switches from the voice pattern B to the voice pattern C at the timing T33, the output period of the voice pattern C may be set to the light emission period TS12. The gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily select and repeat a plurality of voice patterns having different voice output periods, in which case the cycle TS1 has a variable period. Further, the gaming machine 10 may repeat one voice pattern, or may arbitrarily select and repeat a plurality of voice patterns having the same voice output period, in which case the cycle TS1 is a fixed period. Further, the gaming machine 10 may have one of the light emitting period TS11 and the light emitting period TS12 as a fixed period and the other as an indefinite period.

As a result, the game machine 10 has a game guidance effect during the period when the guide light emitting unit emits light in the guide light emitting mode, and pays attention to the display content in the display device 41 during the period when the guide light emitting unit emits light in the game effect light emitting mode. The degree can be increased.

The gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (including the modified example 1) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a game board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 includes a light emitting unit (for example, an inner edge light emitting group 40L) and a display device 41. The control unit can display a normal display and a special display that can be distinguished from the normal display on the display device 41. The control unit has a first light emission control in which the light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting mode to guide the game, and a second light emitting control in which the light emitting unit emits light in the second light emitting mode to produce a game effect. You can do it. When switching from the normal display to the special display on the display device 41, the control unit switches from the first light emission control to the second light emission control.

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) has a game board (game board 30) that is detachably attached to a main body frame (front frame 12) and has a game board light emitting unit (inner edge light emitting group 40L), and a main body. It has a frame light emitting portion (outer edge light emitting group 18L), and includes a transparent member holding frame that is rotatably pivotally attached to the main body frame.

(3) The light emitting unit of (2) includes a game board light emitting unit and a main body frame light emitting unit.
(4) The game machine 10 of (1) has a row-shaped light emitting group including a plurality of light emitting units, and the control unit is a guide target unit (normal variation winning device 37) located on one side of the row light emitting group. ) Is the first light emitting mode, which is a movement display mode from the other side to one side.

(5) The game machine 10 of (4) is provided with a guide target light emitting unit (normal variation winning device light emitting unit 37L) for decorating the guide target unit on one side of the row light emitting group.
(6) The control unit of (1) sets in advance the timing for switching from the normal display to the special display for each variable display pattern.

(7) The game machine 10 includes a game board 30 and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The game board 30 includes a light emitting unit (for example, an inner edge light emitting group 40L) and a display device 41. The control unit can display a normal display and a special display that can be distinguished from the normal display on the display device 41. The control unit has a first light emission control in which the light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting mode to guide the game, and a second light emitting control in which the light emitting unit emits light in the second light emitting mode to produce a game effect. You can do it. The control unit restricts switching from the normal display to the special display on the display device 41 during the first light emission control period.

(8) The control unit of (7) permits the display device 41 to switch from the normal display to the special display during the second light emission control period.
(9) The control unit of (7) switches between the first light emission control and the second light emission control at a predetermined opportunity.

(10) The control unit of (9) sets either one of the first light emission control period and the second light emission control period as a fixed period and the other as an indefinite period.
(11) The control unit of (9) switches between the first light emission control and the second light emission control in synchronization with the switching trigger of the audio output.

[9th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit that decorates the large winning opening according to the opening mode of the large winning opening. The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has two opening modes, a long opening in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time and a short opening in which the large winning opening is opened for a short time.

First, the configuration of the decorative portion of the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment and the light emitting mode in a normal state will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a decorative portion and a light emitting mode in the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment. The game machine 10 shown in (1) shows a light emitting mode when the big winning opening is opened for a long time, and the game machine 10 shown in (2) shows a light emitting mode when the big winning opening is opened for a short time.

First, the configuration of the decorative portion (light emitting portion) of the game machine 10 will be described. The game machine 10 includes a plurality of light emitting units including the frame decoration device 18 on the front frame 12. The light emitting portion provided in the front frame (main body frame) 12 is a form of the main body frame light emitting portion. The frame decoration device 18 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L composed of a plurality of light emitting units. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is arranged in a row on the outer edge side of the game board 30 so as to surround the game board 30. The outer edge light emitting group 18L is a form of the row light emitting group.

The game machine 10 has a plurality of light emitting units including an inner edge light emitting group 40L, a gate light emitting unit 34L, a starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, a normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and a special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. Prepare for 30. The light emitting unit provided in the game board 30 is a form of the game board light emitting unit. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is provided in the center case 40 so as to surround the display device 41. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is arranged in a row on the inner edge side of the game board 30. The inner edge light emitting group 40L is a form of the row light emitting group.

The gate light emitting unit 34L decorates the normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 according to a predetermined light emission mode. The start winning opening light emitting unit 36L decorates the starting winning opening 36 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The ordinary variable winning device light emitting unit 37L decorates the ordinary variable winning device 37 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L decorates the special variable winning device 38 according to a predetermined light emitting mode. The game board light emitting unit performs a game production in a light emitting mode corresponding to the game model.

The special variable winning device 38 corresponds to the large winning opening of the game machine 10, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L corresponds to the light emitting unit that decorates the large winning opening. The gaming machine 10 shown in (1) is in a state in which the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time. The long-time opening is one of a plurality of opening modes in the special variable winning device 38, and the opening time is longer (for example, 30 seconds) as compared with the other opening modes. Further, the long-time opening is a large opening mode in which the special variable winning device 38 has a chance to win a prize. The long-time opening is not necessarily defined by the opening time, but may be defined by the number of winning prizes (for example, 10).

The game machine 10 causes the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L to emit light in a special light emitting mode. For example, the game machine 10 causes the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L to emit light in an enhanced light emitting mode (for example, a rainbow-colored light emitting mode in which predetermined seven colors are circulated and switched) that clearly indicates the aim to the player. At this time, the game machine 10 emits light from the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L in a light emitting mode (for example, clockwise rainbow color display or counterclockwise rainbow color display) according to the gaming state (for example, a big hit state). Let me. A hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L are light emitting modes according to the gaming state.

In addition, the starting gate 34, the starting winning opening 36, and the ordinary variable winning device 37, together with the special variable winning device 38, are aimed at by the player. Therefore, in order to clearly indicate the special variable winning device 38 as a target, the game machine 10 uses the gate light emitting unit 34L, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. The non-enhanced light emission mode (for example, extinguished) is set to be inconspicuous as compared with. For example, in the game machine 10 shown in (1), the special variation winning device light emitting unit 38L is indicated by a hatching pattern (crossed diagonal lines), and the gate light emitting unit 34L and the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L are normally varied. It is shown in white that the light emitting unit 37L of the winning device is in the non-enhanced light emitting mode.

The gaming machine 10 shown in (2) is in a state in which the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time. The short-time opening is one of a plurality of opening modes in the special variable winning device 38, and the opening time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds) as compared with the other opening modes. Further, the short-time opening is an opening mode in which the chance of winning a prize in the special variable winning device 38 is small.

In the game machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a non-enhanced light emitting mode (for example, extinguished). As a result, the game machine 10 clearly shows to the player that it is not worth aiming at the special variable winning device 38. Therefore, the game machine 10 contributes to the reduction of the opportunity for the player to waste the game ball.

Further, in the game machine 10, similarly to the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L, the gate light emitting unit 34L, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L are set as non-enhanced light emitting modes. In the game machine 10 shown in (2), it is displayed in white that the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L, the gate light emitting unit 34L, the starting winning opening light emitting unit 36L, and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L are in a non-enhanced light emitting mode. Shown. At this time, the game machine 10 has an outer edge light emitting group 18L and an inner edge light emitting group 40L in a light emitting mode (for example, a clockwise rainbow color display or a counterclockwise rainbow color display) according to a gaming state (for example, a big hit state). To emit light. A hatching pattern (parallel diagonal lines) indicates that the outer edge light emitting group 18L and the inner edge light emitting group 40L are light emitting modes according to the gaming state.

As described above, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time, which is advantageous for the player, in the emphasized light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L, and the special variable winning device 38, which is disadvantageous for the player. By clearly indicating the short-time opening in the non-enhanced light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L, it is possible to provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player.

In addition, the game machine 10 clearly indicates the gaming state with the normal electric support which is advantageous for the player by the emphasized light emitting mode of the gate light emitting unit 34L and the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, and there is no general electric support which is disadvantageous for the player. By clearly indicating the game state in the non-enhanced light emitting mode of the gate light emitting unit 34L or the normal variable winning device light emitting unit 37L, the game guidance that is beneficial to the player may be performed.

Next, the opening mode of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during the big hit of the game machine 10 and the light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing an opening mode of the big winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the ninth embodiment and a light emitting mode of the big winning opening light emitting unit.

The gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot state. In the jackpot state, the game machine 10 opens the jackpot for each round divided by an interval from the fanfare to the ending. In the game machine 10, the jackpot is set to a plurality of rounds, and the opening time is set for each round. For example, the game machine 10 can open the large winning opening for a long time in the first 10 rounds of the 16 rounds and open the large winning opening for a short time in the latter 6 rounds.

The timings T40 to T41 indicate the fanfare time TS21 before the opening of the special variable winning device 38. The special variable winning device 38 changes from the closed state to the open state at the timing T41, and changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing T42. Therefore, the timings T41 to T42 indicate the long-time open time TS22 of the special variable winning device 38. Further, the special variable winning device 38 changes from the blocked state to the open state at the timing T43, and is open for a long time. Therefore, the timings T42 to T43 indicate the interval time TS23 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing T44, changes from the closed state to the open state at the timing T45, and changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing T46. Therefore, the timing T45 to the timing T46 indicate the short-time opening time TS25 of the special variable winning device 38, and the timing T44 to the timing T45 indicate the interval time TS24 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time.

The long-time open time TS22 is longer than the short-time open time TS25. Further, the interval time TS24 is the same time as the fanfare time TS21 and the interval time TS23. As a result, the game machine 10 secures the detection time of the game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38. Since the game machine 10 has a small chance of winning a prize in the short opening time TS25, the interval time TS24 may be shorter than the fanfare time TS21 and the interval time TS23.

In the game machine 10, since the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is long or short for each round, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a rainbow-colored light emitting mode in the long opening time. Turns off when opened for a short time.

As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 in the rainbow-colored light emitting mode, that is, the special variable winning device 38 that is open for a long time. Further, the game machine 10 can inform the player that the special variable winning device 38 when the light is turned off, that is, the special variable winning device 38 that opens for a short time is not aimed at.

Such a game machine 10 can suppress the player from wasting the game balls in the jackpot that sets the opening time for each round, and can increase the number of prize balls won during the jackpot for the player. it can. Therefore, the game machine 10 can produce a feeling of ball ejection for the player and improve the satisfaction of the player.

In the game machine 10, when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time, the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a rainbow-colored light emitting mode, but the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the light emission mode of the time. Further, the game machine 10 turns off the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time, but emits light when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the aspect.

[Decoration setting process during round]
Next, a decoration setting process during the round for setting a decoration pattern on the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion during the round of the special figure game in the big hit state will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the decoration setting process during the round in the effect control device of the ninth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129.

[Step D201] The control unit sets a decorative pattern during the round in the light emitting unit other than the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38).
[Step D202] The control unit determines the opening time during the round of the big winning opening. The control unit proceeds to step D203 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time, and proceeds to step D204 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a short time. The control unit can determine whether the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time or a short time by comparing a preset threshold value with the opening time during the round. Further, the control unit may refer to the information preset for each round and determine whether the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time or a short time.

[Step D203] The control unit indicates to the player that the opening time of the large winning opening during the round corresponds to a long time, so that the large winning opening is the target, so that the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variation) A rainbow-colored light emitting mode is set in the winning device light emitting unit 38L). The control unit finishes the decoration setting process during the round after setting the rainbow-colored light emitting mode in the large winning opening light emitting unit.

[Step D204] The control unit indicates to the player that the opening time of the large winning opening during the round corresponds to a short time, so that the large winning opening is not the target, so that the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variation) Turn off the light emitting unit 38L) of the winning device. The control unit ends the decoration setting process during the round after setting the light emitting unit of the large winning opening to turn off.

In this way, the control unit controls the large winning opening light emitting unit that decorates the large winning opening according to the opening time during the round of the large winning opening. As a result, the game machine 10 can provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player.

[Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 and 179. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the ninth embodiment is consistent in that the light emitting mode of the light emitting portion that decorates the large winning opening is changed according to the opening mode of the large winning opening, but the change timing is changed to fanfare or The difference is that it is during the interval.

First, the opening mode of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during the big hit of the game machine 10 and the light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing an open state of the large winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the first modification of the ninth embodiment and a light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit.

The gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot state. In the jackpot state, the game machine 10 opens the jackpot for each round divided by an interval from the fanfare to the ending. In the game machine 10, the jackpot is set to a plurality of rounds, and the opening time is set for each round. For example, the game machine 10 can open the large winning opening for a long time in the first 10 rounds of the 16 rounds and open the large winning opening for a short time in the latter 6 rounds.

The timings T40 to T41 indicate the fanfare time TS21 before the opening of the special variable winning device 38. The timings T41 to T42 indicate the long-time open time TS22 of the special variable winning device 38. The timings T42 to T43 indicate the interval time TS23 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. Further, the timing T45 to the timing T46 indicate the short-time opening time TS25 of the special variable winning device 38, and the timing T44 to the timing T45 indicate the interval time TS24 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time.

In the game machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a white light emitting mode in the fanfare time TS21 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the first round after the fanfare. When the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the first round after the fanfare, the game machine 10 turns off the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the first round after the fanfare.

Further, in the game machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a white light emitting mode in the interval time TS23 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the round after the interval. Further, the game machine 10 turns off the light emitting unit 38L of the special variable winning device 38 at the interval time TS24 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the round after the interval.

In this way, the game machine 10 guides the opening mode of the special variable winning device 38 at the fanfare or the interval prior to the round for opening the special variable winning device 38. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to aim at the special variable winning device 38 in the white light emitting mode, that is, the special variable winning device 38 that opens for a long time with a margin of time. In addition, the game machine 10 can guide the player not to aim at the special variable winning device 38 when the light is turned off, that is, the special variable winning device 38 that opens for a short time with a margin of time.

Such a game machine 10 further suppresses the player from wasting the game ball in the big hit in which the opening time is set for each round, and further increases the number of prize balls won during the big hit for the player. be able to. Therefore, the game machine 10 can produce a feeling of a ball coming out for the player, and can further improve the satisfaction of the player.

In the game machine 10, when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time, the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a white light emitting mode, but when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the light emitting mode of. Further, the game machine 10 turns off the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time, but emits light when the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time. It is not limited to this as long as it can be distinguished from the aspect.

[Fanfare medium decoration setting process]
Next, a fanfare intermediate decoration setting process for setting a decorative pattern on the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion in the fanfare or interval before the round of the special figure game in the jackpot state will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a fanfare intermediate decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first modification of the ninth embodiment. The decoration setting process during fanfare is a process executed by the control unit in step D90 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129.

[Step D211] The control unit sets a fanfare intermediate decoration pattern on the light emitting unit other than the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38).
[Step D212] The control unit determines the opening time during the round of the big winning opening. The control unit proceeds to step D213 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time, and proceeds to step D214 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a short time.

[Step D213] The control unit indicates to the player that the opening time of the large winning opening during the round corresponds to a long time, so that the large winning opening is the target, so that the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variation) The white light emitting mode is set in the winning device light emitting unit 38L). The control unit ends the decoration setting process during fanfare after setting the white light emitting mode in the large winning opening light emitting unit.

[Step D214] The control unit indicates to the player that the opening time of the large winning opening during the round corresponds to a short time, so that the large winning opening is not the target, so that the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variation) Turn off the light emitting unit 38L) of the winning device. The control unit ends the fanfare middle decoration setting process after setting the light emitting unit of the large winning opening to turn off.

In this way, the control unit controls the large winning opening light emitting unit that decorates the large winning opening according to the opening time during the round of the large winning opening during the fanfare or during the interval. As a result, the game machine 10 can provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player before the opening of the large winning opening.

[Modification 2 of the ninth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The game machine 10 of the second embodiment of the ninth embodiment is the ninth embodiment in that the end of the opening mode guidance of the large winning opening started during the fanfare or the interval is during the round of the large winning opening. It is different from the game machine 10 and the game machine 10 of the modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

First, the opening mode of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during the big hit of the game machine 10 and the light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing an open state of the large winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the second embodiment of the ninth embodiment and a light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit.

The gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot state. In the jackpot state, the game machine 10 opens the jackpot for each round divided by an interval from the fanfare to the ending. In the game machine 10, the jackpot is set to a plurality of rounds, and the opening time is set for each round. For example, the game machine 10 can open the large winning opening for a long time in the first 10 rounds of the 16 rounds and open the large winning opening for a short time in the latter 6 rounds.

The timings T50 to T51 indicate the fanfare time TS31 before the opening of the special variable winning device 38. In the game machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a white light emitting mode in the fanfare time TS31 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. Further, the game machine 10 continues the white light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L until the timing T52 for detecting the winning of the special variable winning device 38 even after the start of the first round. As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the first round after the fanfare until the correctness of the aim is confirmed. Further, the game machine 10 detects the winning of the special variable winning device 38, and changes the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L from the white light emitting mode to the rainbow color light emitting mode, so that the aim is correct. Can be notified to the player.

Further, the timings T53 to T54 indicate the interval time TS32 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. In the game machine 10, the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L is set to a white light emitting mode in the interval time TS32 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long time. Further, the game machine 10 continues the white light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L until the timing T55 when the special variable winning device 38 detects the winning even after the start of the round. As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a long time in the round after the interval until the correctness of the aim is confirmed. Further, the game machine 10 detects the winning of the special variable winning device 38, and changes the light emitting mode of the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L from the white light emitting mode to the rainbow color light emitting mode, so that the aim is correct. Can be notified to the player.

Further, the timings T56 to T57 indicate the interval time TS33 before the special variation winning device 38 is opened for a short time, and the timings T57 to T58 indicate the short-time opening time of the special variation winning device 38. The game machine 10 turns off the light emitting unit 38L of the special variable winning device 38 at the interval time TS33 before the special variable winning device 38 is opened for a short time. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the round after the interval. Further, the game machine 10 sets the special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L in a blue light emitting mode during the short opening time of the special variable winning device 38. As a result, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 38 is open for a short time in the round after the interval.

In this way, the game machine 10 guides the opening mode of the special variable winning device 38 at the fanfare or the interval prior to the round for opening the special variable winning device 38, and aims at the end of the opening mode guidance of the special variable winning device 38. Notify the player of the correctness.

Such a game machine 10 further suppresses the player from wasting the game ball in the big hit in which the opening time is set for each round, and further increases the number of prize balls won during the big hit for the player. be able to. Therefore, the game machine 10 can produce a feeling of a ball coming out for the player, and can further improve the satisfaction of the player.

[Decoration setting process during round]
Next, a decoration setting process during the round for setting a decoration pattern on the main body frame light emitting portion and the game board light emitting portion during the round of the special figure game in the jackpot state will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the decoration setting process during the round in the effect control device of the second modification of the ninth embodiment. The decoration setting process during the round is a process executed by the control unit in step D91 of the decoration setting process shown in FIG. 129.

[Step D221] The control unit sets a decorative pattern during the round in the light emitting unit other than the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38).
[Step D222] The control unit determines the opening time during the round of the big winning opening. The control unit proceeds to step D224 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a long time, and proceeds to step D223 when the opening time during the round corresponds to a short time.

[Step D223] The control unit indicates to the player that the opening time during the round of the large winning opening corresponds to a short time, so that the large winning opening is not the target, so that the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variation) A blue light emitting mode is set in the winning device light emitting unit 38L). The control unit ends the decoration setting process during the round after setting the blue light emitting mode in the large winning opening light emitting unit.

[Step D224] The control unit determines whether or not a prize is detected at the large prize opening. The control unit proceeds to step D225 when there is no winning detection at the large winning opening, and proceeds to step D226 when there is winning detection at the large winning opening.

[Step D225] The control unit is large because the opening time during the round of the big winning opening corresponds to a long time, so that the player is continuously shown from the fanfare or the interval that the big winning opening is the target. A white light emitting mode is set in the winning port light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L). The control unit ends the decoration setting process during the round after setting the white light emitting mode in the large winning opening light emitting unit.

[Step D226] The control unit confirms that the large winning opening is the target by detecting the winning in the large winning opening, and notifies the player of the correctness of the target, so that the large winning opening light emitting unit (special) A rainbow-colored light emitting mode is set in the variable winning device light emitting unit 38L). The control unit finishes the decoration setting process during the round after setting the rainbow-colored light emitting mode in the large winning opening light emitting unit.

In this way, the control unit continuously controls the large winning opening light emitting unit that decorates the large winning opening according to the opening time during the round of the large winning opening during the fanfare or the interval. The fanfare decoration setting process executed during the fanfare or during the interval is the same as the fanfare decoration setting process described in the first modification of the ninth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. As a result, the game machine 10 can provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player before the opening of the large winning opening, and can continue the game guidance until the winning detection at the large winning opening. Further, the game machine 10 can notify the player of the correctness of the aim.

[Modification 3 of the ninth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the ninth embodiment has a plurality of types of jackpots. Each jackpot has a different number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) for each jackpot and a combination of long and short opening times for each round.

The jackpot of the game machine 10 of the third modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of an opening mode of the big winning opening for each type of big hit of the game machine of the modified example 3 of the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 182, the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the ninth embodiment has a plurality of types of jackpots. For example, the jackpot of the jackpot type 1 has a number of consecutive rounds of 16 (16R), and all rounds are open for a long time (L). Further, in the jackpot of the jackpot type 2, the number of consecutive rounds is 16 (16R), the rounds from 1R to 15R are the long-time opening mode (L), and the rounds of 16R are the short-time opening mode (S). Further, the jackpot of the jackpot type 3 has a number of continuous rounds of 15 (15R), and the rounds of 1R to 14R are in the long-time open mode (L).

In this way, the game machine 10 sets a plurality of types of big hits having different game values to produce a feeling of expectation for the big hits. In such a game machine 10, since the opening mode of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) changes for each round, it is easy for the player to consume waste balls. However, as described in the ninth embodiment (including the first modification and the second modification), the game is guided by the light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L). The machine 10 can prevent the player from wasting the game ball. In addition, the game machine 10 can increase the number of prize balls won during the big hit for the player. Therefore, the game machine 10 can produce a feeling of ball ejection for the player and improve the satisfaction of the player.

The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment described above (including the first to third modifications) has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a winning device (special variable winning device 38), a winning device light emitting unit (special variable winning device light emitting unit 38L), and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). Including. The winning device can be converted into a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the first state. The winning device light emitting unit decorates the winning device in a light emitting mode. When the control unit is in the first control state (open for a short time) in which the winning device is in the second state within the range of the first time, the control unit sets the winning device light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode (turning off, blue light emitting mode). When the winning device is set to the second control state (open for a long time) in which the second state is set within the range of the second time longer than the first time, the second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode (turns off). The rainbow-colored light emitting mode for blue light emitting mode and the rainbow color light emitting mode for blue light emitting mode) control the light emitting unit of the winning device.

(2) The control unit of (1) controls the winning device light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode in the first control state, and controls the winning device light emitting unit in the second light emitting mode in the second control state.
(3) The control unit of (1) is set to the first control state after controlling the winning device light emitting unit in the first light emitting mode, and is set to the second control state after controlling the winning device light emitting unit in the second light emitting mode. To do.

(4) The control unit of (3) continues to control the light emitting unit of the winning device in the first light emitting mode in the first control state.
(5) The control unit of (3) continues to control the light emitting unit of the winning device in the second light emitting mode in the second control state.

(6) When the control unit of (5) detects a winning in the winning device in the second control state, the control unit ends controlling the winning device light emitting unit in the second light emitting mode.
(7) The control unit of (1) executes and controls a gaming state (big hit) including a first control state and a second control state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the big hit determination result is a big hit).

(8) The control unit of (7) executes and controls two or more jackpots in which the combination of the first control state and the second control state is different.
(9) The game machine 10 of (1) includes a second winning device (starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37) different from the winning device (first winning device: special variable winning device 38), and wins a prize. When the device is decorated with the second light emitting mode (enhanced light emitting mode), the second winning device is decorated with the first light emitting mode (non-enhanced light emitting mode).

[10th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 186. The game machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has two large winning openings and a board effect device, and the board effect device guides the operating state of the two large winning openings. First, the game board 30 in the game machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the tenth embodiment.

The game board 30 includes a special variable winning device (first large winning opening) 381 and a special variable winning device (second large winning opening) 382. The special variable winning devices 381 and 382 are all winning devices capable of switching between an open state and a closed state in relation to the result derived by the special figure game. Further, the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 are all controlled by the game control device 100, and are controlled by the game control device 100 so as to be exclusively opened without being simultaneously opened. Further, the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 are not equal value winning openings for the player. For example, the special variable winning device 382 is a winning opening having a higher value for the player than the special variable winning device 381. The difference in value is that the special variable winning device 382 is arranged in the right area of the game board 30 and enables the winning of the game ball with less wasted balls by hitting right. This is because it is arranged in the left side region of the game board 30 and it is not possible to win a game ball in a state where there are few wasted balls even by hitting the left side. The difference between the value of the special variable winning device 381 and the value of the special variable winning device 382 includes a difference in the structure of the special variable winning device 381 and 382 (for example, the size of the opening) and a difference in control (for example, opening). It may be set according to the time and the maximum number of winning balls).

The game board 30 includes a board effect device (first board effect device) 441 and a board effect device (second board effect device) 442. The board effect devices 441 and 442 can move between the initial position and the board effect intermediate position without interfering with the game ball. The board effect devices 441 and 442 shown are all in the initial positions and are in positions that do not interfere with the display area of the display device 41. The board effect device 441 is on the left side of the display area of the display device 41, that is, at a position corresponding to the special variation winning device 381, and the board effect device 442 is on the right side of the display area of the display device 41, that is, the special variation. It is in a position corresponding to the winning device 382.

Next, the relationship between the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 and the operating state of the special variation winning devices 381 and 382 will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. 184 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a large winning opening notification to be opened in the game board of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 185 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a large winning opening notification to be opened in the game board of the tenth embodiment.

The game board 30 shown in (1) shows the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 when the special variable winning device 381 is in the operating state (indicated by parallel diagonal lines). The board effect device 441 moves from the initial position to the middle position of the board effect, and the board effect device 442 maintains the initial position. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player that the special variable winning device 381 is in the operating state.

The game board 30 shown in (2) shows the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 when the special variable winning device 382 is in the operating state (indicated by parallel diagonal lines). The board effect device 442 moves from the initial position to the middle position of the board effect, and the board effect device 441 maintains the initial position. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player that the special variable winning device 382 is in the operating state.

In this way, the game machine 10 can provide game guidance that is beneficial to the player by clearly indicating the opening of any of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 in the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442. .. That is, the player can reduce the wasted balls that do not win the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 by striking the game balls according to the guidance of the game machine 10. In addition, the player can increase the chances of winning the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 by striking the game balls according to the guidance of the game machine 10.

Further, the game board 30 shown in (3) shows another operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 when the special variable winning device 381 is in the operating state (indicated by parallel diagonal lines). The board effect devices 441 and 442 move from the initial position to the board effect middle position. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player that any of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is in the operating state. Further, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 381 is in the operating state by setting the light emitting unit that decorates the special variable winning device 381 to, for example, a blue light emitting mode.

Further, the game board 30 shown in (4) shows another operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 when the special variable winning device 382 is in the operating state (indicated by parallel diagonal lines). The board effect devices 441 and 442 move from the initial position to the board effect middle position. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player that any of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is in the operating state. Further, the game machine 10 clearly indicates that the special variable winning device 382 is in the operating state by setting the light emitting unit that decorates the special variable winning device 382 to, for example, a rainbow-colored light emitting mode.

In this way, the game machine 10 informs the player which of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is in the operating state depending on the combination of the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit. be able to. The game machine 10 decorates the board effect device 441, 442 by replacing the light emitting unit that provides game guidance in combination with the operating state of the board effect device 441, 442 with the light emitting unit that decorates the special variable winning device 382. It may be a light emitting unit. Further, in the game machine 10, the timing of switching the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit may be the same as the timing of switching the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442, or the timing may be delayed to improve the expectation for the light emitting mode. You may.

Next, the operating state of the board effecting devices 441 and 442, the operating state of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit that decorates the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the operating state of the board effect device during the big hit of the game machine of the tenth embodiment and the light emitting state of the big winning opening. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 186, for convenience, the board effect device 441 is the board effect device (left), the board effect device 442 is the board effect device (right), the special variation winning device 381 is the large winning opening (left), and the special variation winning. The device 382 is the large winning opening (right), the light emitting part that decorates the large winning opening (left) is the large winning opening light emitting part (left), and the light emitting part that decorates the large winning opening (right) is the large winning opening light emitting part (right). ).

First, the guidance state shown in FIG. 184 (1) is shown from timing T10 to timing T11. At the timing T10, the game machine 10 operates the board effect device (left) from the initial position to the effect intermediate position, and leaves the board effect device (right) in the initial position. Further, the game machine 10 switches the large winning opening (left) from the closed state to the open state, and leaves the large winning opening (right) in the closed state. Further, in the game machine 10, the large winning opening light emitting unit (left) is set to a blue light emitting mode, and the large winning opening light emitting unit (right) is turned off. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to open the large winning opening (left). At the timing T11, the game machine 10 returns the board effect device (left) to the initial position, switches the large winning opening (left) from the open state to the closed state, turns off the large winning opening light emitting unit (left), and makes an interval. The state is maintained in the middle (timing T11 to timing T12).

Next, the guidance state shown in FIG. 184 (2) is shown from timing T12 to timing T13. At the timing T12, the game machine 10 operates the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the effect middle position, and leaves the board effect device (left) in the initial position. Further, the game machine 10 switches the large winning opening (right) from the closed state to the open state, and leaves the large winning opening (left) in the closed state. Further, in the game machine 10, the large winning opening light emitting unit (right) is set to a rainbow-colored light emitting mode, and the large winning opening light emitting unit (left) is turned off. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to open the large winning opening (right). Further, the game machine 10 can indicate that the value of the large winning opening (right) is higher than that of the large winning opening (left) by the light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit (right). At the timing T13, the game machine 10 returns the board effect device (right) to the initial position, switches the large winning opening (right) from the open state to the closed state, turns off the large winning opening light emitting unit (right), and makes an interval. The state is maintained in the middle (timing T13 to timing T14).

Next, the guidance state shown in FIG. 185 (4) is shown from timing T14 to timing T15. At the timing T14, the game machine 10 operates the board effect device (left) and the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the production intermediate position. Further, the game machine 10 switches the large winning opening (right) from the closed state to the open state, and leaves the large winning opening (left) in the closed state. Further, in the game machine 10, the large winning opening light emitting unit (right) is set to a rainbow-colored light emitting mode, and the large winning opening light emitting unit (left) is turned off. As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to open the large winning opening (right). Further, the game machine 10 can indicate that the value of the large winning opening (right) is higher than that of the large winning opening (left) by the light emitting mode of the large winning opening light emitting unit (right). At the timing T15, the game machine 10 returns the board effect device (left) and the board effect device (right) to the initial positions, switches the large winning opening (right) from the open state to the closed state, and the large winning opening light emitting unit ( Turn off the right). Although the description using the timing chart is omitted for the guidance state shown in FIG. 185 (3), the same guidance state as shown in FIG. 185 (4) can be used.

[Modification 1 of the tenth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the operating state of the board effect device and the light emitting state of the big winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the modified example 1 of the tenth embodiment. Since it may take time to switch the operating state of the board effecting devices 441 and 442 in the gaming machine 10 of the modification 1 of the tenth embodiment, the next round starts after the board effecting devices 441 and 442 are operated. It differs from the tenth embodiment in that it returns to the initial position by. In order to explain the differences between the game machine 10 of the modified example 1 of the tenth embodiment, the operating state of the board effect device (right), the operating state of the large winning opening (right), and the large winning opening light emitting unit ( The light emitting mode of (right) is the scope of explanation.

First, the guidance state shown in FIG. 184 (2) is shown from timing T20 to timing T21. At the timing T20, the game machine 10 operates the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the effect intermediate position. Further, the game machine 10 switches the large winning opening (right) from the closed state to the open state. In addition, the game machine 10 has a rainbow-colored light emitting mode in the large winning opening light emitting unit (right). As a result, the game machine 10 can guide the player to open the large winning opening (right).

The timing T21 is a predetermined number of winning ball detection timings at the large winning opening (right). For example, the timing T21 is the timing at which three winning balls are detected at the large winning opening (right). At this time, assuming that the number of winning balls detected, which is a blocking condition at the large winning opening (right), is 10, the time required to detect the remaining 7 winning balls is used as the initial position return time of the board effect device (right). Can be secured. In addition, in order to secure the initial position return time of the board effect device (right) even when there is no prize in the large winning opening (right), a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed from the timing T20 in the game machine 10. The timing T21 is the earlier of the timing of the winning or the timing of detecting a predetermined number of winning balls at the large winning opening (right).

When the closing condition of the big winning opening (right) is satisfied at the timing T22, the game machine 10 switches the big winning opening (right) from the open state to the closed state and turns off the large winning opening light emitting unit (right). In this way, the game machine 10 limits the operating time of the board effect device (right) to the time TS11, and secures the initial position return time TS12 of the board effect device (right) so that the board effect device (right) can be operated by the timing 22. Right) returns to the initial position.

The gaming machine 10 may include the interval time TS13 (timing T22 to timing T23) in the initial position return time TS12. According to this, the game machine 10 can return the board effect device (right) to the initial position by the next round even if it takes a long time to return the board effect device (right). ..

Although the securing of the return time of the board effect device (right) has been described, the same can be applied to the board effect device (left) as well as the return time of the board effect device (right).
[Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the operating state of the board effect device and the light emitting state of the big winning opening during the big hit of the game machine of the second embodiment of the tenth embodiment. In the game machine 10 of the second modification of the tenth embodiment, the operating state of the board effect devices 441 and 442 guides the game of the next round after the operation of the board effect devices 441 and 442. It differs from the form (including the modified example 1). In order to explain the differences between the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 2 of the tenth embodiment, the operating state of the board effect device (right), the operating state of the large winning opening (right), and the large winning opening light emitting unit ( The light emitting mode of (right) is the scope of explanation.

The big winning opening (right) switches from the closed state to the open state at the timing T30, and switches from the open state to the closed state at the timing T32. From timing T30 to timing T31, the board effect device (right) is in the initial position, and the large winning opening light emitting unit (right) is turned off. At the timing T31, the game machine 10 operates the board effect device (right) from the initial position to the intermediate position of the effect, and sets the large winning opening light emitting unit (right) to a rainbow-colored light emitting mode. As a result, the game machine 10 can provide game guidance for the next round after the timing T34, not for the current round from the timing T30 to the timing T31. Therefore, the game machine 10 can prepare a sufficient preparation time for the player to aim at the big winning opening (right) in the next round.

The board effect device (right) operates from the initial position to the stage during production with a delay time TS21 delayed from the switching of the open state of the large winning opening (right) at the timing T30. As a result, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate that the notification target of the board effect device (right) is not the current round. The delay time TS21 secures a sufficient time to clearly indicate that the notification target is not the current round. For example, in the game machine 10, the timing T30 is the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed from the timing T30, or the predetermined number of winning ball detection timings at the large winning opening (right), whichever is earlier. As a result, the game machine 10 not only secures the delay time TS21, but also secures the game guidance time TS22 during the round, which is sufficient to guide the game of the next round in the current round.

Further, the game machine 10 may secure the game guidance time TS23 during the interval for providing game guidance during the interval in case the game guidance time TS22 during the round is insufficient. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform game guidance between the game guidance time TS22 during the round and the game guidance time TS23 during the interval, that is, between the timing T31 and the timing T33. Further, the game machine 10 can secure the operation time of the board effect device (right) and the initial position return time.

[Modification 3 of the tenth embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the third modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third modification of the tenth embodiment. The game machine 10 of the third modification of the tenth embodiment is different in that the board effect device 443 provides game guidance instead of the board effect devices 441 and 442.

The game board 30 includes a board effect device 443. The board effect device 443 has two operating states, a position during exercise (left) 443a and a position during exercise (right) 443b. In the game machine 10, when the large winning opening (left) (special variable winning device 381) is activated, the board effect device 443 is moved to the exercise position (left) 443a, and the special variable winning device 381 is activated. Guide the player to be in a state.

In addition, the game machine 10 moves the board effect device 443 to the exercise position (right) 443b when the large winning opening (right) (special variable winning device 382) is activated, and the special variable winning device 382 Is instructed to the player that is in the operating state.

In this way, the game machine 10 can guide which of the special variable winning devices 381 and 382 is in the operating state by having one board effecting device 443 having two operating states.

The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment (including the first to third modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a first winning device (special variable winning device 381), a second winning device (special variable winning device 382), a guidance device (board effect device 441, 442), and a control unit. (Game control device 100, effect control device 300) and the like. The first winning device and the second winning device can be converted into a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which the game ball is easier to win than the first state. The guidance device can be converted into a first guidance state and a second guidance state. The control unit puts the guide device in the first guide state when the first winning device is in the second state, and puts the guide device in the second guide state when the second winning device is in the second state. To control.

(2) The guide device of (1) includes a first guide device (board effect device 441) and a second guide device (board effect device 442). When the first winning device is in the second state, the control unit converts the first guiding device from the initial position to the guiding middle position (directing position) as the first guiding state, and the second winning device moves. When the second state is reached, the second guide device is converted from the initial position to the guiding position (directing position) as the second guiding state.

(3) The guide device (board effect device 443) of (1) can be converted into an initial position, a first guide middle position (443a), and a second guide middle position (443b). When the first winning device is in the second state, the control unit converts the guiding device into the first guiding position as the first guiding state, and when the second winning device is in the second state, the second The guidance device is converted to the second guidance position as the guidance state of 2.

(4) The control unit of (1) has a first control state in which the first winning device is in the second state and a second winning device is in the second state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the big hit determination result is a big hit). The game state (big hit) including the second control state that becomes the state is executed and controlled.

(5) The control unit of (1) is in the first guidance state when the first winning device is in the second state, and is in the second guidance state when the second winning device is in the second state. ..
(6) The control unit of (1) sets the guide device to the first when the first winning device or the second winning device is in the second state and the first winning device is in the second state. When the first winning device or the second winning device, which is the second state, is in the guiding state and the first winning device is in the second state after the second winning device is closed, the guiding device is set to the first guiding state, and in the second state. When the second winning device is in the second state after the first winning device or the second winning device is closed, the guiding device is set in the second guiding state.

(7) The control unit of (6) sets the guide device in the second guide state after a predetermined time has elapsed after the first prize device or the second prize device is in the second state.
[11th Embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 200. The game machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment can shoot a POP (Point Of Purchase) created in the game hall and display a shot image of the POP.

First, the game board 30 in the game machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the eleventh embodiment. Since the game machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the game board 30 of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 2, the differences will be described.

The game board 30 includes a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor 650 and a display device 41. The CMOS sensor 650 is provided in a direction capable of photographing the player facing the front of the game board 30. The CMOS sensor 650 is an image sensor that forms a form of photographing means, and can be replaced with, for example, a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or the like. The CMOS sensor 650 may include a required optical device such as a lens or a filter. The display device 41 displays an image taken by the CMOS sensor 650. The display device 41 is a form of captured image display means. For example, the game machine 10 may display an image taken by the CMOS sensor 650 on a sub-display device (not shown) in place of the display device 41 or in addition to the display device 41. The sub-display device may be provided in the game board 30, or may be provided in addition to the game board 30 such as the front frame 12.

The game board 30 is provided with a board effect device 443 on the upper part of the center case 40, which produces a game by operating. The board effect device 443 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 190 toward the center of the display device 41. The CMOS sensor 650 is provided in the board effect device 443, and the shooting position can be changed according to the operation of the board effect device 443. As a result, the game machine 10 can shoot a shooting target (for example, a player or a POP facing the display device 41) at a more suitable angle. Further, the game machine 10 can photograph an imaged object from a plurality of angles by one CMOS sensor 650.

The CMOS sensor 650 is connected to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 inputs a captured image from the CMOS sensor 650.
Next, the state of POP imaging by the CMOS sensor 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of a state of POP shooting in the gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment.

In the game machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 is assembled to the outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable via the front frame 12. The CMOS sensor 650 faces the front of the game machine 10 from a storage portion formed on the front side of the front frame 12.

The game machine 10 permits POP photography with the glass frame 15 open. Since the game machine 10 is locked so that the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 cannot be opened, the free shooting by the player is excluded by setting the opening of the glass frame 15 as a condition for POP shooting.

The game machine 10 receives a shooting operation by the push button 25 and performs POP shooting. At this time, the POP660, which is the shooting target (subject), is held in the shooting range by the staff of the amusement park. The game machine 10 has a live view function of displaying an image captured by the CMOS sensor 650 on the display device 41, facilitating confirmation of the imaging timing and the imaging result of the captured image to be saved.

Next, POP660 will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an example of the POP of the eleventh embodiment. POP660 is a form of advertising medium. The POP 660 includes a POP area 661 and a setting area 662. The POP area is an area for displaying notifications and advertisements from the amusement park (for example, character information such as "new store opening" and images of characters and the like), and is an area targeted for POP display on the display device 41. The setting area 662 is an area for displaying the setting information used for setting the display timing of the POP area 661, and is an area that is not the target of the POP display on the display device 41.

That is, the POP 660 includes a POP display target area that is a target of POP display on the display device 41 and a POP display non-target area that is not a target of POP display on the display device 41. The range of the POP display target area is defined by the two-dimensional bar code 663, which is a form of setting information, and the POP display target area is defined by the range excluding the non-display target area from the total area.

The two-dimensional bar code 663 includes, as the setting information, the designated information that can specify the display timing, or the specific information that can specify the designated information that the game machine 10 holds in advance. For example, the two-dimensional bar code 663 includes a QR (Quick Response) code (registered trademark) and the like. The two-dimensional bar code 663 is an example of optically readable information, and may be a JAN (Japanese Article Number) code or the like, or a character string or the like. The two-dimensional bar code 663 may be printed on the POP 660 or may be affixed to the POP 660 as a sticker. The setting area 662 can be any position in the POP 660 according to the display position of the two-dimensional bar code 663.

Next, the display contents on the display device 41 based on the shooting result of the POP 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of POP display in the display device of the eleventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 displays the POP 660 photographed by the CMOS sensor 650 on the display device 41. The game machine 10 displays POP on the display device 41 at the display timing set based on the two-dimensional bar code 663.

The display device 41 displays the POP display and the display related to the special figure game in the display area 670. As a result, the game machine 10 can display the POP while executing the special figure game.

The display area 670 includes a POP display area 671 and a special figure game display area 672. The display device 41 displays the POP display in the POP display area 671 and displays the display related to the special figure game in the special figure game display area 672. The special figure game display area 672 includes, for example, a special figure game game display 673, a hold digestion display 674, a special figure 1 hold number display 675, and a special figure 2 hold number display 676.

The positions of the POP display area 671 and the special figure game display area 672 in the display area 670 are determined by the setting area 662 in the POP 660. The special figure game display area 672 is determined as a position in the display area 670 corresponding to the position of the setting area 662 in the POP 660, and the POP display area 671 is determined as the remaining position in the display area 670. In this way, the game machine 10 can set the position and display timing of the POP display only by photographing the POP 660. Further, since the game machine 10 makes it possible to confirm the position of the special figure game display area 672 by the setting area 662 in the POP 660, interference between the POP display and the display related to the special figure game can be prevented.

Next, the processing related to the POP setting executed by the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197.
[POP setting condition monitoring process]
First, the POP setting condition monitoring process for monitoring the conditions for performing the POP setting will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the POP setting condition monitoring process in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP setting condition monitoring process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300) in the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

[Step D231] The control unit determines whether or not the game state is waiting for a customer. If the game state is waiting for a customer, the control unit proceeds to step D232, and if it is not waiting for a customer, the control unit ends the POP setting condition monitoring process. The determination of whether or not the game state in this step is waiting for a customer is an example of the POP setting start condition related to the game state. As a result, the game machine 10 can set the POP only at a timing that does not hinder the progress of the game.

[Step D232] The control unit determines whether or not the glass frame is open. The control unit proceeds to step D233 if the glass frame is open, and ends the POP setting condition monitoring process if the glass frame is not open. The determination of whether or not the glass frame is being opened in this step is an example of the POP setting start condition regarding the exclusion of operations by the player. As a result, the game machine 10 can set the POP only for the staff of the game hall.

[Step D233] The control unit determines whether or not a required operation (PB operation) by the push button 25 has been detected. The control unit proceeds to step D234 when the PB operation is detected, and ends the POP setting condition monitoring process when the PB operation is not detected. The determination of PB operation detection in this step is an example of the POP setting start condition for confirming the intention of POP setting. As a result, the game machine 10 can confirm the intention of setting the POP and set the POP.

[Step D234] The control unit performs the POP setting process. The POP setting process is a process for setting the POP display. The POP setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 195. The control unit ends the POP setting condition monitoring process after executing the POP setting process.

[POP setting process]
The POP setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the POP setting process in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D234 of the POP setting condition monitoring process.

[Step D241] The control unit starts shooting with the CMOS sensor 650, displays the shot image on the display device 41 by the live view function, and notifies by character display or voice that the preparation for POP shooting is ready. As a result, the game machine 10 can have the staff of the game hall post the POP660 in front of the CMOS sensor 650 and adjust the posting position while checking the display of the POP660 on the display device 41.

[Step D242] The control unit waits for the detection of the shooting operation, and proceeds to step D243 when the shooting operation is detected. For example, the control unit detects a push button 25 pressing operation by a staff member as a shooting operation.

[Step D243] The control unit acquires the shooting result of POP660 based on the detection of the shooting operation.
[Step D244] The control unit executes the POP setting information detection process. The POP setting information detection process is a process of detecting setting information (POP setting information) related to POP display from the shooting result of POP660. The POP setting information detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 196.

[Step D245] The control unit displays the POP setting information detected by the POP setting information detection process on the display device 41. As a result, the game machine 10 can make the staff of the game hall confirm the POP setting information.

[Step D246] The control unit confirms the POP setting information. The control unit proceeds to step D241 when it receives the resetting of the POP setting information from the staff of the game hall. The control unit ends the POP setting process when it receives confirmation of the POP setting information from the staff of the game hall.

[POP setting information detection process]
The POP setting information detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 196. FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a flowchart of POP setting information detection processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D244 of the POP setting process.

[Step D251] The control unit detects the setting area of POP660 from the shooting result of POP660. The control unit can extract the two-dimensional bar code 663 from the shooting result of the POP 660, and can detect the set area from the display position and size of the extracted two-dimensional bar code 663.

[Step D252] The control unit sets the special figure game display area 672 in the display area 670 based on the detected setting area.
[Step D253] The control unit sets the POP display area 671 by excluding the special figure game display area 672 from the display area 670.

[Step D254] The control unit acquires the setting information from the two-dimensional bar code 663 and ends the POP setting information detection process.
The effect control device 300 can hold the information input from the CMOS sensor 650 in the FeRAM 323. As a result, the game machine 10 can access the information input from the CMOS sensor 650 even if the power is cut off, and it is not necessary to request the staff of the game hall to perform the work related to the POP display every time the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the CPU 311 transfers the image information related to the POP display from the FeRAM 323 to the VDP 312. As a result, the VDP 312 can generate an image to be displayed on the display device 41 using the image information related to the POP display.

Next, the setting information acquired from the two-dimensional bar code 663 will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of setting information acquired from the two-dimensional bar code of the eleventh embodiment.

The control unit acquires setting information from the two-dimensional bar code 663. The setting information includes setting information regarding the special figure game display area occupying the display area 670 and setting information regarding the timing of performing POP display. The setting information regarding the special figure game display area is detected based on the display position and size of the two-dimensional bar code 663. For example, the control unit detects the x-coordinate (Xa) and y-coordinate (Ya) of the reference point as the position of the special figure game display area as the setting information regarding the special figure game display area, and the size of the special figure game display area. As (size), the size in the x direction (Xb) and the size in the y direction (Yb) are detected.

The setting information regarding the timing of performing the POP display includes a setting related to the periodic display (regular display setting) and a setting related to the irregular display (irregular display setting) as setting items. The periodic display setting is a setting relating to the timing of performing the POP display serving as a timer trigger, and the irregular display setting is a setting relating to the timing of performing the POP display serving as an event trigger.

The periodic display setting includes a POP display start timing (regular display start timing) and a POP display end timing (periodic display end timing) as setting items. The periodic display start timing includes the display date, the display time, the displayable state, and the presence / absence of timing adjustment. The display date is the date on which the POP is displayed, and may be uniquely identifiable, may be specified by the day of the week, the number of days elapsed since the start of operation, or may be specified as a period. It may be designated as a day that satisfies the predetermined conditions (for example, Saturday or Sunday between the 20th and 30th of each month). The current date and time in the game machine 10 can be specified by using RTC338.

The display time is the start time of the POP display, and may be uniquely identifiable, or may be specified as a time (for example, 15 minutes per hour) that satisfies a predetermined condition. The displayable state is a game state that allows POP display, and is designated from among the options prepared in advance. The presence / absence of timing adjustment is the presence / absence of timing adjustment of the periodic display start timing, and is specified from the options prepared in advance. The control unit promptly starts the POP display when there is no timing adjustment of the periodic display start timing, and adjusts (delays) the periodic display start timing according to the options when there is a timing adjustment of the periodic display start timing. And start POP display. For example, when the option with timing adjustment is the next fluctuation start, the periodic display start timing is adjusted to the next fluctuation start time of the special figure game.

The periodic display start timing shown in the figure is, for example, the display date is "October 1st to October 7th", the display time is "every hour", the displayable state is "special figure variation display", and the timing is adjusted. The presence / absence is set as "Yes (next fluctuation start)".

The periodic display end timing is the timing at which the POP display ends, and is specified from among the options prepared in advance. Further, as the periodic display end timing shown in the figure, for example, "design stop" is set as the end timing of the POP display. In addition to the event trigger, the periodic display end timing may be a timer trigger such as "15 seconds have passed from the start of the POP display". Further, when the periodic display end timing is used as an event trigger, the periodic display end timing may be related to the variable display game deriving a specific result mode. According to this, the game machine 10 can reduce the risk of displeasing the player even if the POP display is performed for a long time, and rather the POP display can be an element of improving the interest.

The irregular display setting includes the display timing of the POP display (irregular display timing) as a setting item. The irregular display timing includes display conditions. The display condition is a start condition for POP display, and is specified from among the options prepared in advance. In addition, the irregular display timing shown in the figure is, for example, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in that produces an expectation degree) during the period "October 1st to October 7th" and the time "18:00 to 19:00". ) Occurs, replace it. According to this, the game machine 10 can reduce the risk of displeasing the player even if the POP display is performed instead of the specific effect, and rather the POP display can be an element of improving the interest.

[POP display processing]
Next, the POP display process will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a flowchart of POP display processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP display process is a process for displaying POP based on the setting information. The POP setting condition monitoring process is a process executed by the control unit in the effect display editing process (step D23) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

[Step D261] The control unit determines whether or not the POP is being displayed on the display device 41. The control unit proceeds to step D262 when the display device 41 is not displaying POP, and proceeds to step D266 when POP is being displayed.

[Step D262] Since the display device 41 is not displaying the POP, the control unit acquires the POP display start conditions (regular display start timing and irregular display timing).

[Step D263] The control unit determines whether or not the POP display start condition is satisfied, proceeds to step D264 when the POP display start condition is satisfied, and proceeds to step D264 when the POP display start condition is not satisfied. The POP display process is terminated.

[Step D264] The control unit sets the POP display in the POP display area 671.
[Step D265] The control unit sets the special figure game display in the special figure game display area 672, and ends the POP display process.

[Step D266] Since the POP display is being performed on the display device 41, the control unit acquires the POP display end conditions (regular display end timing and irregular display timing). The POP display end condition includes the acceptance of the POP display cancellation operation by the player. The control unit accepts the POP display cancel operation by the player by the POP display cancel process described later with reference to FIG. 199.

[Step D267] The control unit determines whether or not the POP display end condition is satisfied, proceeds to step D268 when the POP display end condition is satisfied, and proceeds to step D268 when the POP display end condition is not satisfied. The POP display process is terminated.

[Step D268] The control unit resets the POP display area 671.
[Step D269] The control unit resets the special figure game display area 672, that is, returns to the state before the POP display, and ends the POP display process.

[POP display cancellation process]
Next, the POP display cancellation process will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the POP display cancellation process in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The POP display cancel process is a process of performing a POP display based on the setting information. The POP setting condition monitoring process is a process executed by the control unit in the effect button input process (step D19) of the main process (see FIG. 125).

[Step D271] The control unit determines whether or not the player has canceled the POP display. For example, the control unit can accept the push button 25 pressing operation during the POP display as a cancel operation. The control unit proceeds to step D272 when the player detects the cancel operation of the POP display, and ends the POP display cancel process when the cancel operation is not detected.

[Step D272] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure game is deriving a specific result (for example, a big hit). The control unit proceeds to step D273 when the special figure game is deriving the specific result, and proceeds to step D274 when the specific result is not being derived.

[Step D273] The control unit sets a change in the display mode of the POP display in the POP display area 671 and ends the POP display cancel process. The display mode of the POP display may be changed as long as it can be recognized by the player, and includes, for example, a color change, enlargement, reduction, and the like. In addition, the control unit edits the display mode of the changed POP display in the effect display editing process (step D23) based on the change of the display mode being set.

[Step D274] The control unit sets the end of the POP display. That is, the control unit accepts the POP display cancellation operation by the player as a POP display end condition in the POP display process. After setting the end of the POP display, the control unit ends the POP display cancel process.

In this way, the game machine 10 associates the notice notification for the specific result derived in the special figure game with the cancel operation of the POP display. As a result, the game machine 10 can produce a feeling of expectation of the player for the cancel operation of the POP display. That is, the game machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation for the POP display, which is a prerequisite for the cancellation operation of the POP display. Such a game machine 10 can reduce the annoyance that the player feels about the POP display, and can improve the notification effect expected by the game field.

Next, the display contents in the display device 41 based on the change in the display mode of the POP display set in step D273 of the POP display cancellation process will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of changing the display mode of the POP display in the display device of the eleventh embodiment.

The display area 670a includes a POP display area 671a and a special figure game display area 672a. The display device 41 displays the POP display whose display mode has been changed in the POP display area 671a, and displays the display related to the special figure game in the special figure game display area 672a. The POP display area 671a replaces the blue display with the rainbow color display in the area where a specific color such as blue is set.

The gaming machine 10 can change the display mode of the POP display by image processing such as reduction, enlargement, and color change. Further, the game machine 10 may change the display mode of the POP display by associating two or more POP displays and storing them in the storage unit and replacing the first POP display with the second POP display. In this case, in the game machine 10, the CMOS sensor 650 provided in the board effect device 443 captures one POP display at different positions of the board effect device 443, and captures two captured images as a first POP display and a second. It can be used as a POP display of.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform a game effect using the POP display by changing the display mode of the POP display. Further, the game machine 10 is reducing the area of the special figure game display area 672a because the POP is being displayed, and cannot secure a sufficient area for producing the special figure game display area 672a. However, the game machine 10 can substitute a part of the effect function in the special figure game display area 672a by sharing a part of the effect in the POP display area 671a.

[Modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment]
Next, the POP of the modified example 1 of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a diagram showing an example of the POP of the modified example 1 of the eleventh embodiment.

The POP660a shown in (1) defines the setting area 662a by two two-dimensional bar codes 663a and 663b. The setting area 662a is a rectangular area including the two-dimensional bar codes 663a and 663b in the area. In this way, the POP660a can freely set the position and size of the setting area 662a according to the display positions of the two two-dimensional bar codes 663a and 663b. For example, the POP 660a can set a setting area 662a that does not interfere with the fan-shaped character strings by displaying the two two-dimensional bar codes 663a and 663b in the downward center portion that does not interfere with the fan-shaped character strings. Further, the two two-dimensional bar codes 663a and 663b define the POP area 661a, which is the remaining area, by defining the setting area 662a.

The POP660b shown in (2) defines the setting area 662b by two two-dimensional bar codes 663c and 663d. The setting area 662b is a rectangular area including the two-dimensional bar codes 663c and 663d in the area. In this way, the POP660b can freely set the position and size of the setting area 662b according to the display positions of the two two-dimensional bar codes 663c and 663d. For example, the POP660b can set a setting area 662b that does not interfere with the character strings arranged in the upward right direction by displaying the two two-dimensional bar codes 663c and 663d in the lower right part that does not interfere with the character strings arranged in the upward right direction. Further, the two two-dimensional bar codes 663c and 663d define the POP area 661b, which is the remaining area, by defining the setting area 662b.

[Modification 2 of the eleventh embodiment]
Next, the state of POP imaging by the CMOS sensor of the second modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a diagram showing an example of a state of POP shooting in the game machine of the second modification of the eleventh embodiment.

In the game machine 10 shown in (1), a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable via a front frame 12. The CMOS sensor 650a is provided in a storage portion formed on the front side of the front frame 12 so as to face the plane direction of the glass frame 15 opened by an angle α. The game machine 10 permits POP photography in a state where the glass frame 15 is opened by an angle α. In the game machine 10, the POP 660a can be supported by the glass frame 15, and when the glass frame 15 is opened by an angle α, the POP 660a can be the front surface of the CMOS sensor 650a.

The game machine 10 receives a shooting operation by the push button 25 and performs POP shooting. At this time, the POP660a to be photographed (subject) is held in the photographing range by the glass frame 15. The game machine 10 has a live view function of displaying an image captured by the CMOS sensor 650a on the display device 41, facilitating confirmation of the imaging timing and the imaging result of the captured image to be saved.

As a result, the game machine 10 can perform POP shooting without the staff of the game hall supporting the POP 660a. In addition, since the display surface of the display device 41 is not shielded by the POP 660a during shooting, the game machine 10 facilitates confirmation of the shooting content.

In the game machine 10 shown in (2), the glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 is assembled to the outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable via the front frame 12. The CMOS sensor 650b is provided on the back surface side of the glass frame 15 so as to face the front side of the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is opened by an angle β. The game machine 10 permits POP photography with the glass frame 15 opened by an angle β. In the game machine 10, the POP 660b can be supported by the front frame 12 (or the game board 30), and when the glass frame 15 is opened by the angle β, the POP 660b can be the front surface of the CMOS sensor 650b.

The game machine 10 receives a shooting operation by the push button 25 and performs POP shooting. At this time, the POP660b, which is the shooting target (subject), is held in the shooting range by the front frame 12. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform POP shooting without the staff of the game hall supporting POP660b.

[Modification 3 of the eleventh embodiment]
Next, the game machine 10 of the third modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the eleventh embodiment can record the fraudulent situation by using the CMOS sensor 650.

[Illegal status record processing]
Next, the fraud situation recording process will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraudulent situation recording processing in the effect control device of the third modification of the eleventh embodiment. The fraud situation recording process is a process of recording the fraud situation taken by the CMOS sensor 650 according to the instruction from the game control device 100. The fraud situation recording process may be, for example, a process executed by a control unit (control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300) after the launch information control process (step D30) of the main process (see FIG. 125). it can.

[Step D281] The control unit determines whether or not a special fraud has been detected. The control unit proceeds to step D282 when the special fraud is detected, and ends the fraud status recording process when the special fraud is not detected. The special fraud is an error for which the fraud status is recorded among the errors detected by the game machine 10. For example, special fraud is an error related to a player's fraudulent activity, such as magnet fraud or radio wave fraud. The control unit (effect control device 300) can receive a notification of special fraud from the game control device 100. The control unit may detect special fraud independently of the game control device 100. Further, the game machine 10 may target all frauds detected by the game machine as special fraud targets.

[Step D282] The control unit captures the fraudulent situation with the CMOS sensor 650. For example, the CMOS sensor 650 can photograph the perpetrator of fraud from the front. In addition, the CMOS sensor 650b shown in the second modification of the eleventh embodiment can photograph fraudulent acts on the winning opening and the like. The control unit may capture one or more still images by the CMOS sensor 650, or may capture a moving image. Further, the control unit may take pictures by the CMOS sensor 650 provided in the board effect device 443 at two or more timings in which the positions of the board effect device 443 are different.

[Step D283] The control unit acquires fraudulent information. The fraudulent information includes the type of error and the time when the error occurs, and may include information useful for grasping the situation when the error occurs, such as the game state when the error occurs.

[Step D284] The control unit records the fraudulent status data, which is a pair of the fraudulent status shooting data and the fraudulent information, in the memory (for example, FeRAM 323). The fraudulent status data recorded in the memory can be accessed from the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 125), and the game machine 10 displays the fraudulent status on the display device 41. can do. The gaming machine 10 may record fraudulent status data in an external memory (for example, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory) that can be connected to the effect control device 300.

Such a game machine 10 suppresses fraudulent acts in the game field and contributes to maintaining a sound game environment.
The gaming machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment (including the first to third modifications) described above has the following features on one side.

(1) The game machine 10 includes a photographing device (CMOS sensor 650) and a display device (display device 41), and includes an image setting means and a display control means. The image setting means is an image (POP660) taken by a shooting device when predetermined shooting conditions (for example, opening the glass frame 15 and pressing the push button 25) are satisfied in a non-gaming state (for example, waiting for a customer). (Image with) as a subject) is stored in the storage unit (FeRAM323), and image display conditions (regular display setting, irregular display setting) are set. When the display condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the image stored in the storage unit on the display device. The image setting means can be realized by the control unit executing a predetermined program. Further, the display control means can be realized by the control unit executing a predetermined program.

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) is provided with a real-time clock (RTC338), and the image setting means sets the output value of the real-time clock to a predetermined value (display date, display time, or display time in the periodic display setting) as an image display condition. It is set to be the display date and display time of the display conditions in the irregular display setting.

(3) In the display control means of (1) or (2), the display area (display area 670) in the display device is divided into a first partial display area (POP display area 671) and a second partial display area (special figure game). It is divided into a display area 672), an image stored in the storage unit is displayed in the first partial display area, and a variable display game is displayed in the second partial display area.

(4) The image setting means of (1) to (3) specifies the display condition of the image from the identification information (two-dimensional bar code 663) included in the image.
(5) The image setting means of (1) to (4) divides the display area into a first partial display area and a second partial display area based on the display position of the identification information included in the image.

(6) The game machines 10 of (1) to (5) have a game board (game board 30) that is detachably attached to the main body frame (front frame 12) and can be rotated with respect to the main body frame. A transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) attached to the shaft is provided.

(7) The game machines 10 of (1) to (6) are provided with a photographing device on the main body frame or the game board so that the transparent member holding frame faces from the back surface side.
(8) The game machines 10 of (1) to (6) are provided with a photographing device in a transparent member holding frame so that the main body frame or the game board faces from the front side.

(9) One of the imaging conditions of the image setting means of (7) or (8) is that the transparent member holding frame is open with respect to the main body frame.
(10) One of the imaging conditions of the image setting means of (9) is that the transparent member holding frame is open at a predetermined angle with respect to the main body frame.

(11) The gaming machine 10 of (1) to (10) includes a canceling means for accepting a canceling operation (pressing operation of the push button 25) to cancel the display of the image.
(12) The canceling means of (11) cancels the canceling operation received in relation to the result derived by the variable display game.

(13) The display control means of (12) changes the display mode of the image when the cancel operation accepted by the cancel means is cancelled.
(14) The game machine 10 of (1) has a movable portion (board effect device) on the game board, and the photographing device is provided on the movable portion.

(15) In the game machine 10 of (14), the first shooting data taken when the movable part is in the first position (for example, the initial position) and the movable part in the second position (for example, during production). The second shooting data taken while at the position) is stored in the storage unit.

(16) When the gaming machine 10 of (15) detects fraud, the gaming machine 10 takes a picture with a picture-taking device.
[Twelfth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 to 207. The gaming machine shown in the twelfth embodiment can perform an effect display in a variable display game by using a push button (option setting unit) 25. First, the connection between the effect control device and the push button 25 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a connection example of the effect control device and the push button according to the twelfth embodiment.

The push button 25 includes a push button LED 25c, a touch sensor 25d, and a push button SW25e. The push button LED 25c is a 9-system full-color LED. The touch sensor 25d can detect the player's touch operation at eight locations. The push button SW25e can detect the pressing operation of the push button 25.

The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs the control signal of the push button LED 25c to the push button 25, and inputs the detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and the detection signal of the push button SW25e from the push button 25.

Here, the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and the detection signal of the push button SW25e. For example, the state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Further, the state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b.

Next, the arrangement of the push button LED 25c and the touch sensor 25d in the push button 25 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button of the twelfth embodiment.

The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface that becomes the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circles 250 to 258 about the size of a fingertip on the upper surface thereof, the small circle 250 is arranged in the center of the upper surface, and 8 is placed on the circumference surrounding the small circle 250. Two small circles 251 to 258 are arranged.

In the small circle portion 250, one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW4) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 251 is located to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW1) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 252 is located diagonally upward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW2) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 253 is located in the upward direction of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW3) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 254 is located diagonally upward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW5) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW6) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 256 is located diagonally downward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW7) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 257 is located in the downward direction of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW8) are arranged within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 258 is located diagonally downward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c is arranged within the circumference thereof. Since the small circle portion 258 does not have the touch sensor 25d arranged, it has a star-shaped polygonal design so as to be easily distinguished from the small circle portions 250 to 257 on which the touch sensor 25d is arranged. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange the touch sensor 25d, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors 25d. The small circle portion 258 is located on the front left side of the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side when the push button 25 is in the center of the game machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side. , It makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle part 258 as the home position.

Although the push button 25 does not have the touch sensor 25d arranged in the small circle portion 258, the touch sensor 25d may be arranged in the same manner as in the small circle portions 250 to 257. Further, the push button 25 may be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the player's touch operation instead of the touch sensor 25d. In that case, the effect control device 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

Next, the effect display in the variable display game using the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display in a variable display game using the push button of the twelfth embodiment of the twelfth embodiment.

The game machine 10 has an RTC 338 in the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 monitors the output of the RTC 338 and performs a roulette display effect using the push button LED 25c of the push button 25 at a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) or at a predetermined time (for example, 12 o'clock). The roulette display effect is a form of the advance notice notification effect executed in relation to the result mode derived from the variable display game (special figure game). The effect control device 300 sets the execution condition of the roulette display effect that the variable display is being performed in the variable display game and that the output from the RTC 338 is a predetermined value.

The push button 25 shown in (1) indicates a light emitting mode of the push button LED 25c after the start of the roulette display effect. The push button 25 sequentially switches on and off of the nine push button LEDs 25c. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform a roulette display such that the lighting portion of the push button LED 25c moves clockwise. The game machine 10 derives a display mode showing the result of the roulette display effect after the roulette display (movement display) for a predetermined time. Further, the game machine 10 can also detect the pressing operation of the push button 25 and derive a display mode showing the result of the roulette display effect.

The push button 25 shown in (2) shows that the push button LED 25c corresponding to the small circle portion 258 having a star-shaped polygonal design is lit in white, and the remaining push button LED 25c is turned off. Such a display mode is one of the display modes derived by the roulette display effect, and the variable display game derives a special result mode (for example, a big hit), or the expected value for deriving the special result mode is Notify that it is big (for example, intense heat reach). The push button LED 25c corresponding to the small circle portion 258 may be lit in rainbow colors to notify that the variable display game derives a special result mode (for example, a big hit probability).

The push button 25 shown in (3) shows that the push button LED 25c corresponding to the small circle portion 252 having no star-shaped polygonal design is lit in white, and the remaining push button LED 25c is turned off. Such a display mode is one of the display modes derived by the roulette display effect, and notifies that the variable display game does not derive a special result mode (for example, off).

As shown in FIG. 1, the push button 25 is located at the player's hand, and it is easy for the player to confirm the display mode. On the other hand, the push button 25 is not easy for a third party other than the player to confirm the display mode. As a result, the game machine 10 determines the execution trigger of the game effect by using the RTC338, and even if the execution timings of the roulette display effect are the same in a plurality of game machines, the game can be played within the range of the game effect. Can be limited to those.

Next, the feedback of the result of the roulette display effect from the push button 25 to the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of feedback of the result of the roulette display effect from the push button of the twelfth embodiment to the display device.

The variable display in-screen 680 is the display content of the display device 41 when the result of the roulette display effect is fed back from the push button 25. The variable display middle screen 680 has a hold digestion display 664, a special figure 1 hold number display 667, a special figure 2 hold number display 668, a special figure game game display 671, a feedback display 682, and a hold memory display 6851 to Includes 6858. The feedback display 682 is a display that guides the feedback of the result of the roulette display effect derived by the push button 25. The display for each hold memory 6851 to 6858 is a display column for each hold memory. The display for each hold memory 6851 to 6858 displays the hold memory whose display mode is updated based on the result of the roulette display effect. For example, the small circle portion 258 displays that the result of the roulette display effect in which the emission color is derived from the rainbow color corresponds to the display for each hold storage 6857.

The push button 25 initializes (for example, turns off) the display of the small circle portions 250 to 258 by feeding back the result of the roulette display effect.
In this way, the game machine 10 can clearly indicate the result of the roulette display effect derived by the push button 25 on the display device 41. Such a game machine can provide a novel effect to the player and can improve the playability.

The gaming machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a first display device (display device 41), a second display device (push button LED 25c), and a control unit (effect control device 300). The first display device can display a variable display game. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit notifies the result mode derived by the variable display game (special figure game) on the second display device by the display mode.

(2) The control unit of (1) includes a real-time clock (RTC338), and one of the predetermined conditions is that the output value of the real-time clock is a predetermined value.
(3) The control unit of (2) has one of the predetermined conditions that the variable display game is being executed.

(4) The second display device of (1) is provided on the operation unit (push button 25) of the main body frame (front frame 12).
(5) The control units of (1) to (3) feed back the results derived by the second display device to the first display device.

(6) The control unit of (5) changes the display mode of the start memory displayed by the first display device.
The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, opto-magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM on which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and it is intended that all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims are included.

10 Game machine 11 Outer frame 12 Front frame 15 Glass frame 25 Push button 30 Game board 41 Display device 650 CMOS sensor 660 POP

Claims (1)

In a game machine provided with a batch display device, a first light emitting unit, and a second light emitting unit on the front side.
The batch display device has a plurality of indicator lights, and can notify the result derivation display and the result display of the variable display game by a predetermined number of indicator lights.
The control unit
A first display mode before and Symbol first light emitting portion and the second light emitting section emits light by sequentially switching a plurality of emission colors in synchronization, and the first light emitting portion and the second light-emitting portion Is capable of controlling the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit in a second display mode in which the plurality of emission colors are sequentially switched to emit light by providing a predetermined time difference.
When a special game state for executing the first game occurs, the special game state and the first game are notified in the second display mode after the special game state is notified in the first display mode. To do
A game machine characterized by that.

Images